EF Johnson 2422001 User Manual

VIKING® VX VHF LTR 25W-110W Repeater
First Printing August 2000
PRELIMINARY
1-1
October 1995
Part No. 001-2008-202
October 1995 Part No. 001-2008-202
1-2
VIKING® VX
VHF LTR REPEATER
PART NO. 242-20X1-213
Copyright 2000 by the E.F. Johnson Company
The E.F. Johnson Company designs and manufactures two-way radio equipment to serve a wide variety of communications needs. Johnson produces equipment for the mobile telephone and land mobile radio services which include business, indus­trial, government, public safety, and personal users.
LAND MOBILE PRODUCT WARRANTY
The manufacturer’s warranty statement for this product is available from your product supplier or from the E.F. Johnson Com­pany, 299 Johnson Avenue, Box 1249, Waseca, MN 56093-0514. Phone (507) 835-6222.
WARNING
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the condition that this device does not cause harm­ful interference. In addition, changes or modification to this equipment not expressly approved by E. F. Johnson could void the user’s authority to operate this equipment (FCC rules, 47CFR Part 15.19).
DO NOT allow the antenna to touch or come in very close proximity with the eyes, face, or any exposed body parts while the radio is transmitting.
To comply with FCC RF exposure limits, DO NOT operate the transmitter of a stationary radio (base station or marine radio) when a person is within four (4) meters of the antenna.
DO NOT operate the radio in explosive or flammable atmospheres. The transmitted radio energy could trigger blasting caps or cause an explosion.
DO NOT operate the radio without the proper antenna installed.
DO NOT allow children to operate transmitter equipped radio equipment.
NOTE: The above warning list is not intended to include all hazards that may be encountered when using this radio.
SAFETY INFORMATION
The FCC has adopted a safety standard for human exposure to RF energy. Proper operation of this radio under normal conditions results in user exposure to RF energy below the Occupational Safety and Health Act and Federal Communi cat ion Commission limits.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice.
E.F. Johnson Company will not be liable for any misunderstanding due to misinformation or errors found in this document.
L TR, LTR-Net, Multi-Net, Viking Head/EFJohnson Logo, Call Guard and SUMMIT are registered trademarks of E.F . Johnson Company All other company and/or product names used in this manual are trademarks and/or registered trademarks of their respective manufacturer.
October 1995
1-3
Part No. 001-2008-202
FCC EXPOSURE LIMITS
This fixed station radio transceiver was tested by the manufacturer with an appropriate antenna in order to verify compliance with Maximum Permissible Exposure (MPE) limits set under Section 2.1091 of the FCC Rules and Regulations. The guide­lines used in the evaluation are derived from T able 1 (B) titled “Limits For General Population/Uncontrolled Exposure” which is from FCC report OET bulletin #65.
Table 1 (B)
FCC Limits for Maximum Permissible Exposure (MPE)
(B) Limits For General Population/Uncontrolled Exposure
Frequency Range (MHz)
0.3 - 1.34 614 1.63 (100)*
1.34 - 30 824/f 2.19/f (180/f 30 - 300 27.5 0.073 0.2 300 - 1500 -- -- f/1500 1500 - 100,000 -- -- 1.0 f = Frequency in MHz *Plane-wave equivalent power density.
Table 2 lists the antennas recommended for use in the VHF frequency range. Each model of this radio was tested with the appropriate antenna listed. The antenna shall be mounted to a tower and be a minimum of 10 meters above the ground at the lowest point on the antenna. The radio manufacturer has determined that the user and service personnel should remain four (4) meters in distance away from the antenna when transmitting. By maintaining this distance, these individuals are not exposed to radio frequency energy or magnetic fields in excess of the guidelines set forth in Table 1 (B).
NOTE: Other antennas or installation configurations that have not been tested may not comply with FCC RF exposure limits and therefore are not recommended.
Electric Field Strength
(E) (V/m)
Magnetic Field Strength
(H) (A/m)
Power Density
(S) (mW/cm
2
)*
2
)
Table 2
Recommended Antennas
(Antenna Manufacturer - Decibel Products)
October 1995 Part No. 001-2008-202
Frequency Antenna Model No.
132-144 MHz DB205E 144-178 MHz DB205F
1-4
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1 INTRODUCTION AND OPERATION
1.1 SCOPE OF MANUAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
1.2 REPEATER DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
1.3 REPEATER IDENTIFICATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
1.4 MODEL NUMBER BREAKDOWN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
1.5 ACCESSORIES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-1
1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
1.7 FACTORY CUSTOMER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
1.8 FACTORY RETURNS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2
1.9 REPLACEMENT PARTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
1.10 SOFTWARE UPDATES/REVISIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
1.11 REPEATER OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3
MAIN PROCESSOR CARD (MPC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
MAIN AUDIO CARD (MAC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
INTERFACE ALARM CARD (IAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.12 REPEATER INFORMATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
HOME REPEATERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
INTER-REPEATER DATA COMMUNICATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
MOBILE TRANSCEIVERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
1.13 REPEATER DATA BUS SIGNALING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7
GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
MOBILE DATA MESSAGE ORDER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
ID VALIDATOR OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
2 INSTALLATION
2.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1
SITE PREPARATION AND ANTENNA INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
2.2 ENVIRONMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1
2.3 VENTILATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-1
2.4 AC POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
2.5 BATTERY BACKUP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
2.6 800W POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-2
AC INPUT REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.7 GROUNDING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
PROTECTION GUIDELINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2.8 UNPACKING AND INSPECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5
2.9 REPEATER DATA BUS INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6
MPC DATA BUS SWITCH SETTINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
MPC DATA BUS JUMPER SETTINGS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2.10 CONNECTING RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT ANTENNAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7
3 SOFTWARE
3.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-1
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
GETTING STARTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
COMPUTER DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
EEPROM DATA STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
COMMAND LINE OPTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
COLOR OR MONOCHROME OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
1
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)
3.2 REPEATER PROGRAM SOFTWARE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
MINIMUM FREE MEMORY REQUIRED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.3 REPEATER PROGRAMMER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
PROGRAM FILES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.4 ALIGNMENT SOFTWARE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.5 HELP F1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
4 PULL DOWN MENUS
4.1 MENU DISPLAYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4.2 FILE MENU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
LOAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
SAVE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
SAVE AS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
NEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
PRINT REPEATER CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
DOS SHELL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
QUIT (ALT X) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.3 EDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
SETUP PARAMETERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
SELECT REPEATER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
ALARM CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
REPEATER TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
DELETE REPEATER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
TELEPHONE PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.4 TRANSFER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
WRITE SETUP PARAMETERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
READ SETUP PARAMETERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4.5 HARDWARE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
HSDB MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
RECEIVE/TRANSMIT DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
RF DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
REVISION/VERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
MODE SELECT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4.6 TEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
POWER AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
RECEIVER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
EXCITER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
FULL REPEATER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4.7 UTILITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
COM PORT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
DISPLAY MODE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
USER LEVEL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
5 REPEATER PROGRAMMING
5.1 CREATING A NEW FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
SELECT REPEATER TO EDIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
5.2 ADDING A REPEATER TO A FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
2
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)
6 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
6.1 RECEIVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
REGULATED VOLTAGE SUPPLIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
HELICAL FILTERS, RF AMPLIFIER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
12.5 kHz IF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
25 kHz IF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
VCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
ACTIVE FILTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
BUFFER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
SYNTHESIZER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
BUFFER AMPLIFIER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
LOCK DETECT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
CHARGE PUMP, LOOP FILTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
VOLTAGE MULTIPLIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
BUFFER AMPLIFIER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
FIRST AND SECOND INJECTION AMPLIFIERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
6.2 EXCITER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-8
VCO (A007). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
VCO BUFFER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
VCO/TCXO FREQUENCY MODULATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-8
SYNTHESIZER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
BUFFER AMPLIFIER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
BUFFER AMPLIFIER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
LOCK DETECT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-10
CHARGE PUMP, LOOP FILTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
BUFFER AMPLIFIER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
RF AMPLIFIERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
6.3 110W POWER AMPLIFIER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
AMPLIFIER/PREDRIVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
DRIVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-11
FINAL AMPLIFIERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
POWER DETECTORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
THERMAL SENSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
FORWARD/REVERSE POWER DETECT, CIRCULATOR, LOW-PASS FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6.4 RF INTERFACE BOARD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13
POWER CONNECTOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
SIGNAL CONNECTOR (J101). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13
FAN CONNECTOR (J104) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
POWER AMPLIFIER CONNECTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-15
EXCITER CONNECTOR (J102). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-16
RECEIVER CONNECTOR (J103) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-17
6.5 800W POWER SUPPLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-20
FILTER BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
POWER FACTOR CORRECTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
MAIN PULSE WIDTH MODULATOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-20
SYNCHRONIZING CIRCUITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
FAN AND THERMAL SHUTDOWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-22
+15V CONVERTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
+5V CONVERTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
-5V CONVERTER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
POWER SUPPLY REPAIR AND ALIGNMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)
6.6 BATTERY BACK-UP MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
CHARGER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-24
REVERSE BATTERY PROTECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
ENGAGING THE RELAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
OVER/UNDERVOLTAGE SHUTDOWN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
BBM FAN CONTROL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
6.7 CARD RACK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
6.9 EXTERNAL CONNECTOR BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
6.10 MAIN PROCESSOR CARD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
MAIN CONTROLLER MICROPROCESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
HIGH SPEED DATA BUS MICROPROCESSOR (U13). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-29
CHIP SELECT DECODERS (U15/U4). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
P1 SIGNAL CONNECTOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-30
J1 COMPUTER CONNECTOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
J2 MEMORY SELECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
J3 BAUD RATE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
S2/S3 HSDB SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
J4 EPROM MEMORY LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
J5 HSDB SPEED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
J6 WATCHDOG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-31
6.11 MAIN AUDIO CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
AUDIO/DATA MICROPROCESSOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
RECEIVE AUDIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-32
RECEIVE SQUELCH CIRCUITRY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
RECEIVE DATA CIRCUITRY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
RECEIVE AUDIO PROCESSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-33
VOTER AUDIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
COMPANDOR OPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
TRANSMIT AUDIO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
TRANSMIT AUDIO PROCESSING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-34
TRANSMIT DATA AND CWID PROCESSING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
P101 SIGNALING CONNECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-35
P100 EXTERNAL OUTPUTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-36
J100 A D LEVEL TEST POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
J101 SPEAKER/MICROPHONE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
J102 LOCAL MICROPHONE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
J103 GROUND. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
J104 EXTERNAL SPEAKER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
J105 WATCH DOG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
J106 TX DATA PATH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
A301 COMPANDOR CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-37
6.12 INTERFACE ALARM CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
RELAY OUTPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
ISOLATED INPUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
ALARM INDICATORS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
ALARM FUNCTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
P500 SIGNALING CONNECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-40
P501 EXTERNAL OUTPUTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-41
J500 A D LEVEL TEST POINT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
J501 GROUND. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
J502 +15V. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
POWER SWITCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
J505 SQUELCH ENABLE OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-43
4
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)
7 ALIGNMENT AND TEST PROCEDURES
7.1 RECEIVER ALIGNMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-1
PRETEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
PROGRAM TUNE-UP CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
RECEIVER FREQUENCY ADJUST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
VCO TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
FRONT END ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
AUDIO DISTORTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
7.2 EXCITER ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-4
PRETEST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
PROGRAM TUNE-UP CHANNEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
VCO TEST. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
TCXO FREQUENCY ADJUST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
TRANSMIT MODULATION ADJUST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5
7.3 110W POWER AMPLIFIER ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-6
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
DRIVER TUNING AND LIMIT ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
POWER AMPLIFIER TUNING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6
7.4 FULL REPEATER ALIGNMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-11
PERFORMANCE TEST PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
REPEATER SETUP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
TRANSMITTER TEST/ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
RECEIVER TESTS/ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-11
TRANSMIT AUDIO/DATA LEVEL ADJUSTMENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-13
VOTER AUDIO LEVEL ADJUSTMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
AUDIO/DATA LEVEL ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
REPEATER OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
8 SERVICING
8.1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1
PERIODIC CHECKS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
SURFACE-MOUNTED COMPONENTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
SCHEMATIC DIAGRAMS AND COMPONENT LAYOUTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
REPLACEMENT PARTS LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
TCXO MODULES NOT SERVICEABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
8.2 SYNTHESIZER SERVICING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
TCXO MODULE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
VOLTAGE CONTROLLED OSCILLATOR (VCO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
INTERNAL PRESCALER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
CALCULATING "N " AND "A " COUNTER DIVIDE NUMBERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.3 RECEIVER SERVICING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
8.4 TRANSMITTER SERVICING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
8.5 POWER SUPPLY SERVICING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3
VOLTAGE CHECKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
8.6 CHIP COMPONENT IDENTIFICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5
CERAMIC CHIP CAPACITORS (510-36xx-xxx) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
TANTALUM CHIP CAPACITORS (510-26xx-xxx). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
CHIP INDUCTORS (542-9000-xxx). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
CHIP RESISTORS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
CHIP TRANSISTORS AND DIODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.7 GRAFOIL REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-7
5
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)
9 PARTS LIST
VIKING VX VHF LTR REPEATER. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
110W VHF LTR REPEATER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
REPEATER ENCLOSURE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
TRANSCEIVER MECHANICAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
CONTROLLER BACKPLANE CARD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
EXTERNAL CONNECTOR BOARD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
POWER SUPPLY FILTER BOARD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
RF INTERFACE BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
REPEATER RX./EX MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
RECEIVER VCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
12.5/25 kHz RECEIVER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
TRANSMIT VCO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
EXCITER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-11
110W POWER AMPLIFIER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
LOW-PASS FILTER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
FORWARD/REVERSE POWER DETECTOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
POWER AMPLIFIER MECHANICAL. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-15
800W POWER SUPPLY MAIN BOARD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-16
AC FILTER BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-21
BATTERY BACK-UP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-22
THERMAL SENSOR BOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
MAIN PROCESSOR CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-23
MAIN AUDIO CARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-25
INTERFACE ALARM CARD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-30
10 SCHEMATICS AND COMPONENT LAYOUTS
10-1 RF MODULE INTERFACE CONNECTOR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10-2 BACKPLANE CABLE CONNECTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
10-3 REPEATER CABINET EXPLODED VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10-4 REPEATER REAR VIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10-5 REPEATER FRONT VIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
10-6 INPUT/OUTPUT ALARM INTERCONNECT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
10-7 RF INTERCONNECT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-4
10-8 BACKPLANE INTERCONNECT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-5
10-9 RF INTERFACE BOARD COMPONENT LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6
10-10 RF INTERFACE BOARD SCHEMATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7
10-11 RECEIVER COMPONENT LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8
10-12 RECEIVER VCO COMPONENT LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
10-13 RECEIVE VCO SCHEMATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10
10-14 RECEIVER SCHEMATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-11
10-15 EXCITER COMPONENT LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12
10-16 TRANSMIT VCO COMPONENT LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
10-17 TRANSMIT VCO SCHEMATIC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14
10-18 EXCITER SCHEMATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15
10-19 110W POWER AMPLIFIER COMPONENT LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16
10-20 110W POWER AMPLIFIER SCHEMATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17
10-21 FORWARD POWER COMPONENT LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
10-22 REVERSE POWER COMPONENT LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18
10-23 FORWARD/REVERSE POWER SCHEMATIC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19
10-24 MAIN PROCESSOR CARD COMPONENT LAYOUT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20
10-25 MAIN PROCESSOR CARD SCHEMATIC (1 OF 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
6
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)
10-26 MAIN PROCESSOR CARD SCHEMATIC (2 OF 2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-22
10-27 MAIN AUDIO CARD COMPONENT LAYOUT (COMPONENT SIDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-23
10-28 MAIN AUDIO CARD COMPONENT LAYOUT (OPPOSITE COMPONENT SIDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-24
10-29 MAIN AUDIO CARD SCHEMATIC (1 OF 3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-25
10-30 MAIN AUDIO CARD SCHEMATIC (2 OF 3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-26
10-31 MAIN AUDIO CARD SCHEMATIC (3 OF 3). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-27
10-32 INTERFACE ALARM CARD COMPONENT LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-28
10-33 INTERFACE ALARM CARD SCHEMATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-29
10-34 BACKPLANE COMPONENT LAYOUT (CARD SIDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-30
10-35 BACKPLANE COMPONENT LAYOUT (OPPOSITE CARD SIDE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-31
10-36 BACKPLANE SCHEMATIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-32
10-37 POWER SUPPLY FILTER BOARD COMPONENT LAYOUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
10-38 POWER SUPPLY FILTER BOARD SCHEMATIC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-33
10-39 POWER CABLE CONNECTOR AND SCHEMATIC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-34
LIST OF FIGURES
1-1 REPEATER IDENTIFICATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-2 PART NUMBER BREAKDOWN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-3 REPEATER CARDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
2-1 BATTERY BACKUP CONNECTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-2 TEMPERATURE SENSOR CABLE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2-3 POWER CABLE CONNECTOR AND SCHEMATIC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2-4 RACK MOUNTED REPEATERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5
2-5 5-CHANNEL COMBINING SYSTEM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-6
2-6 RJ-11 TO BNC MPC JUMPERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-7 RJ-11 TO RJ-11 MPC JUMPERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-8 ANTENNA CONNECTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-9 RJ-11 TO BNC ADAPTER MODULE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7
2-10 SINGLE REPEATER INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-11 TWO REPEATER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8
2-12 THREE OR MORE REPEATERS INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2-13 MIXED VIKING VX AND CR1100 REPEATER INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-10
3-1 REPEATER TEST MENU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3-2 PROGRAMMING FLOWCHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
4-1 FILE MENU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4-2 LOAD FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4-3 SAVE FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
4-4 EDIT PROGRAMMING FLOWCHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4-5 EDIT MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4-6 REPEATER LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4-7 ALARM CONFIGURATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4-8 INPUT ALARMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4-9 OUTPUT ALARMS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4-10 ALARM CROSS REFERENCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4-11 REPEATER TYPE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4-12 DELETE REPEATER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4-13 TRANSFER MENU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-14 WRITE SETUP PARAMETERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-15 PROGRAM WRITE SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-16 READ SETUP PARAMETERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-17 READING SETUP. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
4-18 HARDWARE PROGRAMMING FLOWCHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-6
7
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)
4-19 HARDWARE MENU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4-20 HSDB MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4-21 MOBILE TRAFFIC MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4-22 RF LINE MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4-23 REVISION/VERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4-24 REVISION/VERSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
4-25 TEST PROGRAMMING FLOWCHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4-26 TEST MENU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4-27 UTILITIES MENU. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4-28 COM PORT SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4-29 LAPTOP INTERCONNECT CABLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
4-30 COLOR MODE SELECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
5-1 SETUP PARAMETERS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
6-1 12.5 kHz IF RECEIVER BLOCK DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6-2 U201/U203 BLOCK DIAGRAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6-3 25 kHz IF RECEIVER BLOCK DIAGRAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6-4 SYNTHESIZER BLOCK DIAGRAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6-5 EXCITER BLOCK DIAGRAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6-6 110W POWER AMPLIFIER BLOCK DIAGRAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
6-7 RF INTERFACE BOARD BLOCK DIAGRAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-19
6-8 BLOCK DIAGRAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-21
6-9 NO LOAD CHARGE VOLTAGE vs. TEMPERATURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-25
6-10 BACKPLANE CONNECTORS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26
6-11 EXTERNAL CONNECTOR BOARD. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-27
6-12 U27 BLOCK DIAGRAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-28
6-13 4 I/O J1 ALARM OUTPUTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
6-14 4 I/O J2 ALARM OUTPUTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-38
6-15 S500-S503. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
6-16 ALARM EXAMPLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-39
6-17 MAIN PROCESSOR CARD BLOCK DIAGRAM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-45
6-18 MAIN AUDIO CARD LOGIC BLOCK DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-46
6-19 MAIN AUDIO CARD AUDIO BLOCK DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47
6-20 INTERFACE ALARM CARD BLOCK DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48
7-1 RECEIVER ALIGNMENT POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7-2 EXCITER ALIGNMENT POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
7-3 110W POWER AMPLIFIER ALIGNMENT POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7-4 RF INTERFACE BOARD ALIGNMENT POINTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7-5 POWER EXTENDER CABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7-6 RECEIVER TEST SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7-7 EXCITER TEST SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
7-8 110W POWER AMPLIFIER TEST SETUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-10
7-9 S100 SETTING. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-15
7-10 NEW HSDB SWITCH SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
7-11 J2 TERMINAL BLOCK. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
7-12 MAC ALIGNMENT POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
7-13 MAIN PROCESSOR CARD ALIGNMENT POINTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-18
7-14 INTERFACE ALARM CARD ALIGNMENT POINTS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-19
8-1 LOCK DETECT WAVEFORM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8-2 MODULUS CONTROL WAVEFORM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8-3 POWER SUPPLY REAR VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8-4 POWER SUPPLY FRONT VIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8-5 3-DIGIT RESISTOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6
8
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)
1-1 REPEATER ACCESSORIES 1-2 1-2 ACTIVE REPEATER ALARMS 1-5 2-1 OUTPUT VOLTAGES 2-3 2-2 OVER VOLTAGE 2-3 5-1 REPEATER SETUP PARAMETERS 5-2 8-1 CERAMIC CHIP CAP IDENTIFICATION 8-6 8-2 CHIP INDUCTOR IDENTIFICATION 8-7
LIST OF TABLES
9
TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONT.)
10
INTRODUCTION AND OPERATION

SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION AND OPERATION

1.1 SCOPE OF MANUAL

This service manual provides installation, opera­tion, programming, service, and alignment informa­tion for the VIKING
VX LTR Repeater, Part No.
242-20X1-213.

1.2 REPEATER DESCRIPTION

The VIKING VX repeater is designed for opera­tion in a Johnson LTR system. It operates on the VHF channels from 132-178 MHz. Channel spacing is
12.5/25 kHz and RF power output is adjustable from 25 to 125 watts.
This repeater is modular in design for ease of ser­vice. There are separate assemblies for the logic cards, receiver
, exciter, power amp lifier and power
supply sections.
This repeater is progr ammed wit h a l apt op or per ­sonal computer using the 2000 Series Programmer software, Part No. 023-9998-390.
1.4 MODEL NUMBER BREAKDOWN
The following breakdown shows the part num-
ber scheme used for the Viking VX.
3242- 2 0 X 1 -
1
2
1 = 132-150 MHz 3 = 150-174 MHz
VHF
25-110W
12.5/25 kHz
LTR

Figure 1-2 PART NUMBER BREAKDOWN

1.5 ACCESSORIES
The accessories available for the Viking VX LTR repeater are listed in Table 1-1. A brief description of some of these accessories follows.
2-Wire Telephone Interconnect Card (TIC) - This card provides an interface between the Repeater and a phone line to permit telephone calls to be placed to and from mobile transceivers.
The VIKING VX repeater i nte rf ace s wit h a MPC (Main Processor Card) and MAC (Main Audio Card) to provide LTR operation. All signal ports used to interface to the Repeater are on J2 located at the back of the cabinet.

1.3 REPEATER IDENTIFICATION

The repeater identi ficati on number is pri nted on a label that is affixed to the inside of the repeater cabi­net. The following infor mation is contained in that number:
Repeater
ID
20X4X
Revision
Letter
Manufacture
Date
Week Year A= Waseca
WarrantyPlant
Number
12345A324A

Figure 1-1 REPEATER IDENTIFICATION

LTR System ID Validator - If an invalid ID is detected on the repeater data bus, the audio of the mobile receiving the ca ll is disabled.
2000 Series Service Kit - This kit contains an alarm wire harness, extender power cable, programming kit, extender card, ex tender harne ss, and a TIC bi as cab le. These items are used when tuning the repeater and while troubleshooting.
Battery Backup and Cable Option - This option can be factory or field installed (refer to installation instructions 004-2000-830). It includes the battery backup module that resides in the power supply and the necessary interconnect cabling to connect the repeater to the batterie s (see Section 2.5).
RJ-11 to 6-BNC Adapter - This adapter box pro­vides connections for the high speed data bus at the rear of the repeater and the data bus from the logic drawers in existing repeater syste m s.
1-1
August 2000
Part No. 001-2001-200
INTRODUCTION AND OPERATION

Table 1-1 REPEATER ACCESSORIES

Accessory Part No.
2-Wire Telephone Interconnect Card 023-2000-370 LTR System ID Validator 023-4408-500 2000 Series Service Kit Battery Backup option and cable 023-2000-835 RJ-11 to 6-BNC Adapter 3’ RG-58 coax w/male BNC for HSDB 023-4406-5 05 6’ RG-58 coax w/male BNC for HSDB 597-3001-2 14 Custom Frequency Prog rammin g & Set up 023-2000-100 PC programmer PGMR 2000 software 023-9998-390 Service Microphonee 589-0015-011 50 ohm Termination HSDB 023-4406-504 Programming cable kit Extender Card 023-2000-230 Extender cable kit, 7 ft. 250-2000-010
1
Includes: extender card, extender cables, TIC bias cable
and programming cable kit (PN 023-2000-195).
2
Required when using Viking Networking products, one per station. 3 Included in 2000 Series Service Kit (PN250-2000-230).
1
2
3
250-2000-230
023-2000-194
023-2000-195
1.7 FACTORY CUSTOMER SERVICE
The Custom er Service Department of the E.F. Johnson Company provides customer assistance on technical problems and the availability of local and factory repair facilities. Customer Service hours are 7:30 a.m. - 4:30 p.m. Central Time, Monday - Fri­day. There is also a 24-hour emergency technical sup­port telephone number. From within the continental United States , the Customer Service Department can be reached toll-free at:
1-800-328-3911
When your call is answered at the E.F. Johnson Company, you will hear a brief messa ge informing you of numbers that can be entered to reach various departments. This number may be entered during or after the message using a tone-type telephone. If you have a pulse-type telephone, wait until the message is finished and an operator will come on the li ne t o assist you. When you enter a first number of "1" or "2", another num ber is requested to further categorize the type of information. You may also enter the 4-digit extension number of the per son th at you want to reach.
PC Programmer PGMR Software - 3.5" program­ming disk used to program the repeater.
Programming Cable Ki t - This kit connects the MPC and a computer during programming and for monitor­ing repeater activity at the site.
Extender Card - Used to exte nd the cards plugged into the backplane beyond the card rack enclosure when tuning the repeater and while troubleshooting.
Extender Cable Kit - These are seven foot extension cables for the RF T ransceiver power and data, when the transceiver is removed from the cabinet.
1.6 PRODUCT WARRANTY
The warranty statement is available from your product supplier or from the Warranty Department, E.F. Johnson Company, 299 Johnson Avenue, Box 1249, Waseca, MN 56093- 0514. This information may also be requested by phone from the Warranty Department. The Warranty Department may also be contacted for Warranty Service Reports, claim forms, or any questions with warranties or warranty service by dialing (507) 835-6970.
August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200
FAX Machine - Sales (507) 835-6485 FAX Machine - Cust Serv (507) 835-6969
If you are calling from outside the continental United States, the Customer Service telephone num­bers are as follows:
Customer Service Department - (507) 835-6911 Customer Service FAX Machine - (507) 835-6969
You may also contact the Customer Service Department by mail. Please include all information that may be helpful in solving your problem. The mailing address is as follows:
E.F. Johnson Company Customer Service Department 299 Johnson Avenue P.O. Box 1249 Waseca, MN 56093-0514
1.8 FACTORY RETURNS
Repair service is normal ly availab le through local authorized E.F. Johnson Land Mobile Radio Service Centers. If local service is not avail able, the equipment
1-2
INTRODUCTION AND OPERATION
can be returned to the factory for repair. However, it is recommended that you contact the Field Service Department before retu rning equip ment. A servic e representative may be able to suggest a solution to the problem so that return of the equipment would not be necessary.
Be sure to fill out a Factor y Repair Req uest For m #271 for each unit to be repaired, whether it is in or out of warr anty. These forms are available free of charge by calling the r epa ir lab ( see Sect ion 1.7) or by requesting them when you send a unit in for repair. Clearly describe the difficulty experienced in the space provided and also note any prior physical dam­age to the equipment. Then include a form in the ship­ping container with each u nit . Your phone number and contact name are very important because there are times when the technicians have specific questions that need to b e answered in order to completely iden­tify and repair a problem.
When returning equipment for repair, it is also a good idea to use a PO number or some other re fe rence number on your paperwork in case you need to call the repair lab about your unit. These numbers are ref­erenced on the repair order and it makes it easier and faster to locate your unit.
Return Authorization (RA) numbers are not nec­essary unless you have been given one by the Field Service Department. They require RA numbers for exchange units or if they want to be aware of a spe­cific problem. If you have been given an RA number, reference this number on the Factory Repair Request Form sent with the unit. The repair lab will then con­tact the Field Service Department when the unit arrives.
You may also send your order by mail or FAX. The mailing address is as follows and the FAX num­ber is shown in Section 1.7.
E.F. Johnson Company Service Parts Department 299 Johnson Avenue P.O. Box 1249 Waseca, MN 56093-0514
1.10 SOFTW ARE UPDATES/REVISIONS
All inquiries concerning updated software, its installation and revisions should be directed to the Customer Service Department (see Section 1.7).
1.1 1 REPEATER OPERATION
1.11.1 MAIN PROCESSOR CARD (MPC)
Refer to Figure 1-3.
Programming Jack
J1 provides input connection from the computer and the "flash memory" in the MPC. The program­ming information in an IBM
PC programs the MPC directly from the serial card through an interconnect cable to the COM1 or COM2 port.
Reset
S1 provides a manual res et of the Mai n Pro cessor Card (MPC). A manual reset causes a complete power-up restart.
Display and LEDs
1.9 REPLACEMENT P ARTS
E.F. Johnson replacement parts can be ordered directly from the Service Parts Department. To order parts by phone, dial the toll-free number and then enter "1" as described in Section 1.7. When ordering, please supply the part number and quantity of each part ordered. E.F. Johnson dealers also need to give their account number.
If there is uncertainty about the part number, include the designator (C112, for example) and the model number of the equipment the part is from (refer to Section 1.4).
Each combination of DS1 display read-out and CR4/CR5 indication refers to an active alarm. See Ta ble 1-2 for alarms and definitions. LED indica­tions: CR1 is blinking; MPC is operational, CR2 on; 380-470 MHz, off is 475-520 MHz and CR5 on; indi­cates an LTR Repeater.
RF Thermal Sense Alarm Condition Exists
NOTE: Safety measures are disabled
Ok
August 2000
1-3
Part No. 001-2001-200
INTRODUCTION AND OPERATION
Alarms
When the Repeater is in Test mode the safety measures are disabled. Therefore, if the Repeater is keyed for an extended period and the power amplifier temperature increa se, thermal shutdown will not occur . There are pop-up windows that appear in the Test mode screens to alert the user that there is an alarm and action should be taken. Refer to Figure 1-3 for an example of this type of alarm.
S1
RF INTERFACE
BOARD
PROG JACK
RESET
DS1
GND
GRN
CR1
YEL
CR2
YEL
CR5
RED
CR4
RED
CR3
J1
J103
J100
A D
LEVEL
LOCAL
ON/OFF/VOL
R236
MIC
J102
SPKR
J101 J104
EXT SPKR
+15V
+15V ACC
-5V
+5V
CWID HANG SWITCH MOBILE XMIT
J500
TP
J501
GND
J502
+15V
S508
IACMACMPC
PA
EXCITER/RECEIVER

Figure 1-3 REPEATER CARDS

August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200
1-4
INTRODUCTION AND OPERATION

Table 1-2 ACTIVE REPEATER ALARMS

Alarm No. DS1 CR3 CR4 Definition
Test Mode IAC input 1 Active IAC input 2 Active IAC input 3 Active IAC input 4 Active MAC Processor Alarm HSDB Processor/Cable Alarm IRDB Cable Alarm Switch (RNT)/CIM Channel Problem Alarm TIC Processor Alarm MMC Processor Alarm VNC Alarm AC Power Failure Battery Power Failure Power supply thermal sense Fan 1 current out of specification Fan 2 current out of specification IAC mismatch RF shutdown RF Half Power Mode Thermal sense in RF portion RF Finals 1-2 power out fai lure RF Finals 3-4 power out fai lure RF VSWR Failure Normal Synthesizer Tx Lock failure Normal Synthesizer Rx Lock failure HS Synthesi zer Tx Lock failure HS Synthesizer Rx Lock failure RF Quarter Power Alarm
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42
0 1 2 3 4 9
0 1 2 3 4
9 A B C D E
F
0
1
2
3
4
5
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 A
Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off
On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On On
On On On On On On On On On On On
On Off Off Off Off Off Off
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
On
1-5
August 2000
Part No. 001-2001-200
INTRODUCTION AND OPERATION
1.11.2 MAIN AUDIO CARD (MAC)
Refer to Figure 1-3.
External Speaker Jack
J104 provides repeater audio output to an exter nal speaker. The local volume control adjusts the volume level of this speaker.
Speaker/Microphone Jacks
J102 provides audio input from a microphone. J101 provides the receive audio to the microphone.
Local On/Off/Volume Control
R236 provides control o f the rec eive a udio ou tput to J101 and J104. Turning this control clockwise past the detent applies voltage to the local audio amplifier.
A D Level Test Point
J100 provides audio/data level output for test level checks.
Power Supply On/Off Switch
S508 turns the power supply DC voltages on and
off from the IAC in the front of the repeater.
Power Indicator
CR501 indicates the +5V supply is at normal level and applied to the IAC. CR524 indicates -5V supply is at normal level and applied to the IAC. CR523 indicates the +15V accessory supply is at nor­mal level. CR525 indicates that the +15V supply is at normal level and applied to the IAC.
CWID Indicator
Indicates that the CW Identification is being transmitted on the lowest-frequency repeater. The CWID is a continuous-wave (CW) transmission of the station call letters in Morse Code to satisfy the station identification re quirement. The CWID is programmed into the repeater memory. This indicator also is used when an alarm is transmitted with Mor se code.
Hang Indicator
Ground
J103 is connected to ground for test equipment
when monitoring test point J100.
1.11.3 INTERFACE ALARM CARD (IAC)
Refer to Figure 1-3.
Voltage Test Output
J502 provides a +15V test point on the IAC.
Ground
J501 is connected to ground for test equipment
when monitoring voltage test point J502.
A D Level Test Point
J500 provides a test point to monitor audio and
data levels, AC fail and the rmal sensor.
Indicates that the hang word is being transmitted by the repeater. This word is transmitted on calls in which the channel is held for the duration of the call and not just for the duration of the transmission. The hang word tells the mobiles to stay on the same chan­nel and not re-access the system when responding to a call.
Switch Call Indicator
Not used in th e LTR repeater.
Mobile Call Indicator
Mobile-to-repeater transmission in progress is indicated by the Mobile Call Indicator.
Xmit Indicator
This indicates that the repeater transm itter is keyed by the logic.
August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200
1-6
INTRODUCTION AND OPERATION
1.11.4 POWER SUPPLY
The power supply is sealed and the line and sup­ply fuses are inside. If a supply fuse opens, the power supply must be removed and opened for repair (see Section 2.4 and 8.5). Refer to the power supply ser­vice manual 004-2000-810.
Standby Battery Jack
This provides a connection point for a +24V DC standby battery. Current is drawn from the battery only when the power supply output voltage is lower than the battery voltage. A trickle charge switch on the supply ensures that the battery is fully charged. Disable this switch when a separate battery charger is used (see Section 2.5).
1.12 REPEATER INFORMATION
1.12.1 INTRODUCTION
NOTE: The VIKING VX does not require a separate LTR logic drawer.
The repeater model used in an LTR system is determined by freque ncy range. 800 MHz s ystems use the VIKING VX (2008-232/-234) or LTR 8000s, UHF use 20x4-232/-234 or 1010s, and VHF use 2011/2031­213 or 110 0s. Repeat ers ope rate on a singl e fre quen cy (one repeater is required for each channel). The MPC in each repeater performs all control and signaling functions on that channel. Information is exchanged between repeaters via a high-speed data bus (modular cable). No system controller is required.
it is always monitoring its Home repea ter to deter­mine which channel is free and if it is being called by another mobile.
The Home repeater is always used to make a call unless it is busy . When the Home repeater is busy, any other repeater in the site may then be used. Up to 250 ID codes are assigned to each repeater. An ID code and Home repeater number are the "address" of the mobiles in the system. Therefore, up to 1250 separate addresses can be assigned in a 5-repeater system and up to 5000 can be assigned in a 20-repeater system. An ID code may be assigned to an individual mobile or a group of mobiles as required.
1.12.3 INTER-REPEATER DATA COMMUNICA-
TION
Data communication between VIKING VX and LTR repeaters at a site is via a high-speed data bus. This bus cable is installe d in a daisy-chain manner between repeaters. If both VIKING VX and LTR repeaters are located a t a site, 20 rep eaters can be interconnected. Refer to Section 2.8 for information on connecting the data bus.
1.12.4 MOBILE TRANSCEIVERS
The mobile and handheld transceivers used in an LTR system must be compatible with the type of sig­naling in use and also the frequency range.
1.13 REPEATER DATA BUS SIGNALING
1.13.1 GENERAL
Optional ac cessories, such as the Telephone Inter­connect Card (TIC) can be inst alled in the repeater and the ID V alidator drawer can be installed in the repeater rack. Refer to Johnson LTR ID Validator Manual, Part No. 001-4408-501 and Johnson Telephone Intercon­nect Card Manual, Part No. 004-2000-3 70 for det ail ed information.
1.12.2 HOME REPEATERS
All mobiles have one of the site repeaters assigned as its "Home" repeater. This is the repeater from which it receives mo st of its contr ol informa­tion. When a mobile is not placing or receiving a call,
A single-line serial data bus interconnects the logic units of all the LTR repeaters at the site. The first repeater powered on generates the synchroniza­tion pulse that is used by all other repeaters to deter­mine their time sl ot o n the data bus. If al l r epe aters are powered on at the same time, the lowest numbered repeater generates the synchronization pulse. There are 21 slots with 1-20 used for repeater reporting and 21 used by the ID Validator (see Section 1.13.3). The time slot used by a repeater is determined by the num­ber assigned to that repeater by the programming in the MPC. Repeater 1 uses time slot 1, repeater 5 uses time slot 5 , and so on. The data rate on the repeater data bus is 18,750 bits per second.
August 2000
1-7
Part No. 001-2001-200
INTRODUCTION AND OPERATION
In its time slot, each repeater places information on the data bus indica ting its sta tus. If a repea ter i s not busy, only start bits appear in its slot. If a repeater is busy, it places in its slot the Home rep eater and ID code of the mobile receiving the cal l on that repeater. If a repeater number is unassigned, nothing appears in that time slot.
1.13.2 MOBILE DATA MESSAGE ORDER
Each repeater monitors all the time sl ots on the repeater data bus. If it detects its numb er in another time slot, it begins transmitting an additional data mes­sage to its mobiles. This message tells mobiles pro­grammed to detect that ID code to go to that repeater to receive a call. This additional message continues for as long as the mobile is transmitting on the other repeater.
The sequence of data messages transmitted on a home repeater is as follows: Every third messag e is to the mobile currently receiving a call on that repeater. Then alternating b etween these mess ages are messag es to its mobiles that have been trunked to other repeat­ers. For example, assume that fivedifferent mobiles on
a five-repeater system are making calls. If all have Repeater 1 as their home channel (not very likely in actual practice), the data message order on Repeater 1 is as follows: 1 2 3 1 4 5 1 2 3 and so on.
1.13.3 ID VALIDATOR OPERATION
If the ID Validator is used, it is programmed wit h the status of up to all 5000 home repeater/ID code combinations possible with a 20-channel system. Each combination is programmed as either valid or invalid. Information in the twenty time slots on the repeater data bus is monitored. If an invalid home repeater/I D code combination is dete cted, the ID Vali­dator places in time slot 21 the number of the repeater being used by the invali d mobile and al so the ID code. When a repeater detects its number in slot 21, it trans­mits the tur n-off code (31) to the mobile receiving the call. That mobile then squelches and resumes moni­toring its home channel. This effectively disables the invalid mobile becau se it cannot ta lk to anyone. Wh en the turn-off code is sent, the repeater places "21" in the repeater po sition of its time slot to i ndicate to the ID validator that turn-off has occurred.
August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200
1-8
SPECIFICATIONS
INTRODUCTION AND OPERATION
GENERAL (Per TIA 603)
1
Frequency Ranges 132-178 MHz Transmit/Receive (132-150 MHz and 150-178 MHz) Dimensions 9.125" H x 17" W x 20.9" D AC Voltage/Frequency 100-240V AC/50-60 Hz AC Current 0.38A (Standby), 1.4A (25W), 5A (110W) AC Input Power 45W (Standby), 170W (25W), 560W (110W) DC Current at 26.5V DC (Low Power) 6.3A (25W), 16.5A (110W) Number of Channels 1 (Synthesized, programmable) Channel Spacing 12.5 /15 /25 /30 kHz selectable Channel Resolution 5 / 6.25 kHz Temperature Range -30°C to +60°C (-22°F to +140°F) Duty Cycle Continuous FCC Type Acceptance ATH2422001 FCC Compliance Parts 15, 90
RECEIVER (Per TIA 603)
12 dB SINAD 0.35 µV 20 dB Quieting 0.50 µV Signal Displacement Bandwidth ±1 kHz (12.5/15 kHz), ±2.0 kHz (25/30 kHz) Adjacent Channel Rejection -85 dB (12.5/15 kHz), -90 dB (25/30 kHz) Intermodulation Rejection -85 dB Spurious & Image Rejection -100 dB Audio Squelch Sensitivity 12 dB SINAD Audio Response +1/-3 dB TIA Audio Distortion Less than 3% at 0.5W/16 ohms Local Audio Power 0.5W/16 ohms Audio Sensitivity ±0.75 kHz (12.5/15 kHz), ±1.5 kHz (25/30 kHz) Hum & Noise Ratio -50 dB Frequency Spread 2 MHz Frequency Stability ±2.5 PPM -30°C to +60°C (-22°F to +140°F) Modulation Acceptance Bandwidth ±3.5 kHz (12.5/15 kHz), ±7.0 kHz (25/30 kHz)
TRANSMITTER (Per TIA 603)
RF Power Out 132-178 MHz 110W (Default setting), 25-110W (Variable Set Point) Spurious Emissions -90 dBc Harmonic Emissions -90 dBc Audio Deviation ±1.6 kHz (12.5/15 kHz), ±3.5 kHz (25/30 kHz) LTR Data Deviation ±0.8 kHz (12.5/15 kHz), ±1 kHz (25/30 kHz) CWID Deviation ±1 kHz (12.5/15 kHz), ±2 kHz (25/30 kHz) Repeat Deviation ±0.8 kHz (12.5/15 kHz), ±1.5 kHz (25/30 kHz) Audio Response +1/-3 dB TIA Audio Distortion Less than 2% Hum & Noise (TIA) -50 dB (12.5/15 kHz), -55 dB (25/30 kHz) Frequency Spread 6 MHz Frequency Stability ±2.5 PPM -30°C to +60°C (-22°F to +140°F) Emission Designators 11K0F3E, 16K0F3E
These general specifications are intended for reference and are subject to change without notice. Contact the Systems Applications consultants for guaranteed or additional specifications.
August 2000
1-9
Part No. 001-2001-200
INTRODUCTION AND OPERATION
1-10
August 2000
Part No. 001-2001-200

SECTION 2 INST ALLATION

INSTALLATION

2.1 INTRODUCTION

Information in this section tells how to set up the repeater for operat ion in an LTR system. It is assumed that the repeater has been previously aligned at the factory or as described in the alignment procedure in Section 7.
Even though each repeater is thoroughly aligned and tested at the factory, it is good practice to check performance before it is placed in service. This ensures that no damage occurred during shipment and that the repeater is otherwise operating properly. Per­formance testing is described in Sections 7.1, 7.2, 7.3 and 7.4.
2.1.1 SITE PREPARATION AND ANTENNA IN-
STALLATION
Site preparation and antenna installation are not within the scope of this manual. Basic installation requirements are discussed in the "Dealer Guide To Site Preparation", Part No. 004-8000-100. Factory installation is also available. Contact your Johnson representative for more information.

2.2 ENVIRONMENT

The following conditions should be considered when selecting a site for the Repeater.
Operating Temperature.
-30°C to +60°C (-22°F to +140°F).
NOTE: If the Repeater is installed in an area that exceeds these environmental conditions, the site should be equipped with air filters to remove dust and dirt that could cause the equipment to overheat.
When the repeaters are installed in an environ­ment that contains small airborne particles, e.g. grain dust or salt fog, the repeater cabinets need to be sealed. A h eat exchanger, i.e. air conditioner, is then required to cool the cabinets. The air conditioners must be suited for the environment. Each repeater (110W) requires >2400 BTU/hr dissipation to main­tain exterior cabinet temperature.

2.3 VENTILATION

The RF modules and the power supply are equipped with fans, controlled by thermostats, that force air through the equipment for cooling. The air flow is from the front to the back of the equipment. This permits the Repeaters to be stacked or rack mounted (see Figure 2-4). There are a few consider­ations when installing Repeaters to provide adequate air circulation.
1. The Repeaters should b e mounte d with a minimum
of 6 inches clearance between the front or back of the cabinet for air flow. The power supply requires a minimum of 18 inches at the back of th e Repeater for removal.
Humidity.
Less than 95% non-condensing rela ti ve humidity
at 50°C.
Air Quality.
For equipment operating in a controlled environ-
ment with the Repeaters rack mounted, the airborne particles must not exceed 30 µg/m
3
.
For equipment operating in an uncontrolled envi-
ronment with the Repeaters rack mounted, the air­borne particles must not exceed 100 µg/m
3
.
NOTE: Repeaters should not touch. Leave a mini­mum of one empty screw hole (approximately 1/2") between repeaters vertically especially for bottom ventilation slots in high power repeaters.
2. Cabinet enclosures must provide air vents for ade-
quate air circulation.
3. Temperature and humidity must be considered
when several Repeaters are installed at a si te . Thi s might require air conditioning the site.
August 2000
2-1
Part No. 001-2001-200
INSTALLATION
2.4 AC POWER
The AC power source to the Johnson VIKING VX Repeater can be 120V AC or 240V AC. Nothing need be done to the power supply for 240V AC opera­tion. However, a 240V AC outlet requires that the 120V AC power plug be replaced. A locking AC power cord is provided for the supply.
The 120V AC cord is a standa rd 3-wi re gro unde d cord used with a standard AC wall outlet. The outlet must be capable of supplying a minimum of 560W. With the nominal 120V AC input, the source must supply 5A for each 110W repeater and should be pro­tected by a c i rcuit breaker. It is recommended that all of the repeaters in a rack should not be on the same breaker in order to provi de one operational repeat er in the event a breaker trips. An AC surge protector is recommended for all equipment.
CHARGER
ACTIVE SWITCH
CHARGER
ON
BATTERY
FAULT
EARTH
GROUND
LINE
REVERSE BATTERY
NEUTRAL
B- B+ TEMP

Figure 2-1 BATTERY BACKUP CONNECTOR

The temperature sensor is required to adjust the
charging voltage over temperature.
Each Repeater requires an outlet, so for a 5-chan­nel system, a minimum of 5 outlets is required. An additional three outlets should be added for test equip­ment. The outlets must be within 3 feet of each Repeater cabinet. Future system expansion should be considered when electrical work is being planned for the initial system.
The VIKING VX Repeater power supply can be equipped with an optional 24V DC back-up in the event of AC p ower failure . Since the transmitter will remain on full power, if desired, the DC power source must have a current capabil ity of abo ut 20 A per 1 1 0W repeater or 100A for 5 - 110W repeaters. The multi­coupler requires another 0.5A for a total system requirement at 24V DC of 100.5A for 110W repeaters.
2.5 BATTERY BACKUP
If the power supply is equipped with battery backup, screw lugs are provided on the front of the power supply for battery co nnections ( see Figure 2-1). A switch is provi ded fo r charging the battery or can be off if a separate battery charger is used. A battery temperature sensor connection is also provided. The temperature sensor cabl e is shown in Fi gure 2-2. LED indicators are provided to show Reverse Battery con­nection, Charger On/Off and Battery Fault.
TEMP
NEGATIVE
BATTERY
TERMINAL
WHT
BLK
GND

Figure 2-2 TEMPERATURE SENSOR CABLE

2.6 800W POWER SUPPLY
The power supply has four voltage output levels (see Table 2-1). Each voltage is set to ±1% at +25°C (+77°F). The output of this supply is capable or run­ning any 2000 series repeater.
Each output is overload protected such that the power supply current limits and automatically resets when the overload is removed (see Table 2-1).
Each output is over voltage protected such that the power supply shuts down when an over voltage condition exists, usually when a component in the supply has failed (see Table 2-2). The power supply must be manually res et by toggling the Ena ble Li ne or removing A C power for more than 10 seconds.
August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200
2-2
INSTALLATION
BACKPLANE
4
1
52
36
J2
A
2
4
1
3
5
B
6
7 8
9
10
7
11
8
12
9
C
J2
A
B
C
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
POWER HA R NESS
+26.5V
GROUND
+15V
AC FAIL IN
POWER SWITCH
THERMAL SENSOR
N/C
+15V
N/C
N/C
+5V
-5V
TO
RFIB
2
1
4
5
REPEATER
3
BACKPLANE
9
6
8
7
TO

Figure 2-3 POWER CABLE CONNECTOR AND SCHEMATIC

Table 2-1 OUTPUT VOLTAGES

Voltage Current Wattage
+26.5V 22A 583W
+15V 5A 75W
+5.2V 5A 26W
-5V 1A 5W

Table 2-2 OVER VOLTAGE

Voltage Range
+26.5V +32V to +33V
+15V +16V to +18V
+5.2V +6V to +7V
-5V -6V to -7V
2.6.1 AC INPUT REQUIREMENTS
AC Input Voltage: 100-240V AC Line Frequency: 50-60 Hz AC In-rush: 60A maximum Overall Efficiency: >70% at 100V AC
>80% at 240V AC Lightning protection: 6kV for < 1ms Power Factor: >0.97 at full load Brown Out Voltage: 80V AC Temperature -30°C - +60°C (full power)
Power factor correction per IEC555. The Power supply has the following safety agency approvals pending: UL1950, CSA22.2-950, TUV EN60950 (IEC950)
When the AC input voltage is below 90V AC, the maximum output power is decreased t o keep the input current constant. If a battery back-up is installed, the batteries take over when the AC input voltage falls below 80V AC (dependant on power output).
The AC input connector is an IEC connector equipped with a locking mechanism.
2-3
August 2000
Part No. 001-2001-200
INSTALLATION
The operating temperature range is -30°C to +60°C (-22°F to +140°F), i.e. the same as the repeater. The fan is thermostatically controlled by the internal temperature. When the internal heatsink temperature reaches +45°C (113°F) the fan turns on. When the heatsink temperature drops below +35°C (95°F) the fan turns off. If the internal heatsink temperature reaches +90°C (+194°F) the power supply turns off until the heatsink temperature drops below +85°C (+185°F). The over-temperature shutdown and restart are automatic.
2.7 GROUNDING
CAUTION
PROPER SITE GROUNDING AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION ARE VERY IMPORTANT TO PRE­VENT PERMANENT DAMAGE TO THE REPEATER.
As in any fixed radio installation, measures should be taken to reduce the possibility of lightning damage to the Viking VX equipment. Proper ground­ing eliminates shock hazard, protects against electro­magnetic interference (EMI) and lightning.
Ground each piece of equipment separately. Do not ground one piece of equipment by connecting it to another grounded piece of equipment. A good DC ground must be found or created at the site. Rooftop site grounds can be researched through the building management or architects. Tower site grounds must be made with grounding rods. The many techniques for providing adequate grounds for towers and poles and for installi ng bui ldin g g round b us li nes a re be yond the scope of this manual. Refer to National Electrical Code article 250 "Grounding Techniques," article 800 "Communications Systems" and follow local codes.
The ground bus should be routed to the floor area within 5 feet of the system with a runner of 6 AW G or larger solid copper wire or 8 AWG stranded copper wire.
same wire sizes as specified for coaxial cables for any ground connections required by the secondary protectors.
RF
An RF protector keeps any lightning strike to the antenna feed line or tower from damaging the Repeat­ers. Instal l this protection in-line with the combiner and antenna feed line.
RF protectors are selected by calculating the maximum instantaneous voltage at the output of the combiner. Do this by using the following equation.
V
= 1.414 (X) (√P(50))
P
where:
V
= Voltage at the output of the combiner.
P
P = repeater output in watts
X= for VSWR=
1.05 1.10 : 1
1.09 1.20 : 1
1.13 1.30 : 1
1.17 1.40 : 1
1.20 1.50 : 1
1.30 1.86 : 1
Example: Repeater power output of 60W with a VSWR of 1.3 : 1 (for this VSWR, X = 1.13):
V
= 1.414 (1.13) (√60(50))
P
VP = 1.59782 (√60(50)) VP = 1.59782 (54.772256) V
= 87.52V
P
Telephone Line
There are four types of pr ote ct ion suppressors for telephone lines; Gas Tube, Silicon Avalanche Diode, Metal Oxide Varistor and Hybrid.
The outer conductor of each transmission line at the point where it enters the building should be grounded using 6 AWG or larger solid copper wire or 8 AWG stranded wire.
Secondary protection (other than grounding) pro­vides the equipment protection against line transients that result from lightning. There are two types of sec­ondary protection, RF and Telephone Line. Use the
August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200
The hybrid protector is ideal for E.F. Johnson equipment, and is strongly recommended. A hybrid suppressor combines several forms of protection not available in just one type of device. For example, a high-speed diode r eacts fir st, cl amping a volta ge str ike within 10 ns, a heavy duty heat coil reacts next to reduce the remainder of the current surge, and a high­powered three-element gas tube fires, grounding Tip and Ring.
2-4
2.7.1 PROTECTION GUIDELINES
Follow these guidelines for grounding and light­ning protection. Each Repeater instal l ati on si te is dif ­ferent; all of these may not apply.
1. Ensure that ground connections make good metal-
to-metal contact (grounding rod, grounding tray, metal conduit) using #6 ga uge solid wi re or braid ed wire straps.
2. With surge protectors, ensure that ground wires go
directly to ground, and not through other equipment.
3. Run the ground wire for RF coax prote ctors directly
to ground.
4. With coax protectors, ensure maximum instanta-
neous voltage does not exceed the rated voltage.
INSTALLATION
5. Do not run ground wire s parallel t o any other wir ing
(e.g. a ground wire parallel to a telephone line), except other ground wires.
6. Double check all equipment for good ground and
that all connections are clean and secure.
2.8 UNPACKING AND INSPECTION
E.F. Johnson ships the Repeater securely crated for transportation. When the Repeater arrives, ensure the crates remain upright, especially if storing the crates tem porarily.
When unpacking the Repeater, check for any visi­ble damage or problems caused by shipping. If there is obvious damage from shipping mishaps, file claims with the carrier. If there appears to be any damage caused before shipping , file a claim with E.F. Johnson. Contact Customer Service for assistance (see Section
1.7).
If everything appears undamaged, remove the Repeater equipment from the crate, using normal pre­cautions for unpacking.
TX COMBINER
DUPLEXER
RX MULTICOUPLER
POWER STRIP

Figure 2-4 RACK MOUNTED REPEATERS

2-5
Part No. 001-2001-200
August 2000
INSTALLATION
T/R ANTENNA
RECEIVER 1
RECEIVER 2
RECEIVER 3
RECEIVER 4
RECEIVER 5
RECEIVER
MULTICOUPLER
PREAMPLIFIER

Figure 2-5 5-CHANNEL COMBINING SYSTEM

NOTE: Do not discard the packing materials. If you must return an item; use the same packing materials and methods (including static protective bags for cir­cuit cards) to repack the equipment. You are responsi­ble for proper repacking. E.F. Johnson cannot be responsible for damage to equipment caused by negligence.
NOTE: Repeaters should not touch, leave a minimum of one empty screw hole (appr oxi m at el y 1/2 ") bet w een repeaters vertically especially for bottom ventilation slots in high power repeaters.
TRANSMITTER 1
DUPLEXER
TRANSMITTER 2
BANDPASS
FILTER
TRANSMITTER
COMBINER
TRANSMITTER 3
TRANSMITTER 4
TRANSMITTER 5
sion) that connects to a HSDB that is also servicing LTR 1010 repeaters, other VIKING VX repeaters that use VIKING VNC cards, or an ID Validator must also use the adapter module. The BNC Adapter Module is installed on the back of the VIKING VX repeater cabi­net (see Figure 2-13).
Systems constructed onl y wit h LTR VIKING VX repeaters that have Version 202 or later HSDB soft­ware and do not use VNC cards can be connected directly to the HSDB from the RJ-11 jack on the back of the repeater.
NOTE: Each repeater should be grounded separately by connecting a ground bus from the g r o und lu g o n the back side of the RF module to the ground bar on the rack (see Figure 2-8).
2.9 REPEATER DATA BUS INSTALLATION
VIKING VX repeaters with Hig h Speed Dat a Bus (HSDB) sof tware Version 201 or earlier (reference U14 label) installed on the MPC board must use the optional RJ-1 1 to BNC Adapter Module (see Table 1-1 and Figure 2-9) to connect the HSDB. Any VIKING VX repeater (regardless of the HSDB software ver-
August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200
2.9.1 MPC DA TA BUS SWITCH SETTINGS
Switch settings on the MPC for the two types of installations require S2 and S3 sections to be switched as indicated in Figures 2-10 through 2-13.
2.9.2 MPC DATA BUS JUMPER SETTINGS
Refer to Figure 2-6 for crystal selection and HSDB Code selections jumper placement. The jumper on J5, pins 2-3 select s 12 MHz crystal for LTR. The jumper on J4, pi ns 3-4 conne cts EP ROM U14, pin 27 (A14) to +5V for LTR single-ended 5V data bus.
2-6

Figure 2-6 RJ-11 TO BNC MPC JUMPERS

231J5
J4
123
46
5
HSDB CODE SELECTION
CRYST AL SELECTION
23
1
J5
J4
1
2
3
4
6 5
HSDB CODE SELECTION
CRYSTAL SELECTION
INSTALLATION
GROUND
RX
TX
Jumper J4 must be placed with the following
guidelines (see Figure 2-6):
J4, pins 3-4 for operation with the RJ-11 to BNC adapter module and mixed systems (20x1 and 1100) with any version of HSDB software.
J4, pins 3-4 for operation with the RJ-11 to BNC adapter module with 2008 only systems with any version of HSDB software.
J4, pins 5-6 for operatio n wit h the RJ-11 to RJ-11 cable with 2008 only systems wit h Version 202 or later HSDB software.

Figure 2-8 ANTENNA CONNECTIONS

BLU
BLK
GRN
YEL
ORN
RED
PIN 5 HSDB-
PIN 1 TLA-
PIN 3
IRDB-
PIN 6
HSDB+
PIN 2 TLA+
PIN 4
IRDB+

Figure 2-7 RJ-11 TO RJ-11 MPC JUMPERS

2.10 CONNECTING RECEIVE AND TRANSMIT
tions are shown in Figure 2-8. Although each trans­mitter and receiver could be connected to a separate antenna, this is usually not done because of the large number of antennas required by a multiple repeater installation. Therefore, an antenna combining system is usually used. An example of a combining system for a five-channel system is shown in Figure 2-5. The amount of power loss introduced by a combiner depends on the type of combiner used. If it has a loss of 3 dB, power output to the antenna is reduced by half.
ANTENNAS
Receive and Transmit antenna connector loca-
Figure 2-9 RJ-11 TO BNC ADAPTER MOD-
ULE
2-7
Part No. 001-2001-200
PIN 1 ORN PIN 2 BLK PIN 3 RED PIN 4 GRN PIN 5 YEL PIN 6 BLU PIN 7 GRY PIN 8 BRN
August 2000
INSTALLATION
MPC SWITCHES
ON21876543ON2143
S3
S2

Figure 2-10 SINGLE REPEATER INSTALLATION

MPC SWITCHES
ON
2143
S3
2
4
3
1
8765
ON
S2
August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200
MPC SWITCHES
ON
2143
S3

Figure 2-11 TWO REPEATER INSTALLATION

2
43
1
8765
ON
S2
2-8
MPC SWITCHES
END REPEATER
2
14
3
ON
INSTALLATION
4
2
3
1
8765
ON
S3
S2
MPC SWITCHES
MIDDLE REPEATERS
2
143
S3
ON
43
2
1
S2
8765
ON
MPC SWITCHES
END REPEATER
2
143
S3
ON
4
2
3
1
876
5
ON
S2

Figure 2-12 THREE OR MORE REPEATERS INSTALLATION

2-9
August 2000
Part No. 001-2001-200
INSTALLATION
MPC SWITCHES
2
143
1
ON
LOGIC
RECEIVER
EXCITER
4
2
3
876
5
ON
S3
MPC SWITCHES
2
143
ON
S3
S2
ID VALIDATOR
OPTIONAL
2
43
8
1
765
ON
50 OHM
S2
TERMINATION
50 OHM TERMINATION
LOGIC
RECEIVER
MPC SWITCHES
2
143
S3
2
43
5
1
ON
S2

Figure 2-13 MIXED VIKING VX AND CR1100 REPEATER INSTALLATION

August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200
EXCITER
6
8
7
ON
2-10

SECTION 3 SOFTWARE

SOFTWARE

3.1 INTRODUCTION

The Johnson 2000 Repeater Program on 3.5 inch disk, Part No. 023-9998-390, uses an IBM
personal computer to program the EE PROM Memory in the Main Processor Card (MPC). To lessen the chance of programming errors and simplify operation, the pro­gram uses yes/no questions or toggles through the available responses.
The computer is connected directly from the serial card to the MPC. The interconnect cables used are shown in Figure 4-29. The DB-9 t o 8-pin modular adapter is connected to the serial port of the computer and an interconnect cable connects the adapter to the MPC.
NOTE: These connections are for the IBM computer and may differ from an IBM compatible. In whic h case, consult the manuals for your computer for serial card outputs and connections.

3.1.1 HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

This manual introduces the program and illus­trates how to use the features. This m anual is orga­nized to easily fi nd programming information wi th the Table of Contents, Index and Parameter Tables for the responses required for programming.
Graphic reproductions of the screens are shown for reference. Adjacent to the screens are tables to provide the paramete rs, availa ble respon ses and a bri ef description of the parameter. It is not the intent of th is manual to teach computer operation, but to allow the user to become familiar with the available screens and the responses without having to be at the computer.

3.1.2 GETTING STARTED

Follow the computer ins tructions for loading the disk. The MS-DOS Revision 2.0 or later operating system is needed to run the programs. The computer needs to have RS-232C capability, for example, the Serial Card in slot "COM1" or "COM2".

3.1.3 COMPUTER DESCRIPTION

The programming software is designed to run on an IBM PC or compatible computer that me et the fol­lowing minimum requirements.

1. One 3.5" high density disk drive.

2. 640K of memory

3. MS-DOS version 2.0 or higher

4. One serial port

5. Monochrome or color monitor and video card

Although the program uses color to highlight cer­tain areas on the screen, a monochrome (black and white) monitor or LCD laptop also provide satisfac­tory operation. Most video formats such as EGA and VGA are supported. A serial port is required to con­nect the Repeater to the computer. This port is stan­dard with most computers.
The cables from the Repeater to the computer are not included. With most computers, the adapter-to­computer cable is a standard DB-25 M-F cable, PN 023-5800-017, (the male connector plugs into the adapter). If your computer requires a male connector, a male-to-male cable is also available, PN 023-5800-
016. The cable from the adapter to the Repeater has a modular-type 8-pin connector (see Figure 4-29).
NOTE: Before starting you should a lready k now how to start MS-DOS
, format and make backup copies of disks, copy and delete files, and run programs. If you are unfamiliar with any of these actions, refer to the MS-DOS manual for your computer for more informa­tion (see Section 5-1).
3.1.4 EEPROM DATA STORAGE
The data pr ogrammed into the MPC is stored by an EEPROM Memory. Since this type of device is nonvolatile, data is stored indefinitely without the need for a constant power supply. A repeater can be
August 2000
3-1
Part No. 001-2001-200
SOFTWARE
removed from the site or even stored indefinitel y with­out affecting prog ramming. Since EEPROM Memory is also reprogrammable, a new device is not nee ded if programming is changed.
3.1.5 COMMAND LINE OPTIONS
HELP
To show all options available from the command line type: /h or /?. Either ’/’ or ’-’ can be used. For example: 2004pgmr /h
The options can be entered in any order. For example: 2004pgmr /d /b /c
COM PORT
The Johnson programming software defaults to serial port COM1. However, if this port is already in use, the software ca n be re configured to use ser ia l p ort COM2. To do this, use one of the following methods:
1. When running the compiled (.EXE) version, type /
c2 on the command line after the program name. For example: 2004pgmr /c2 or -c2

2. Select COM port from Utilities heading.

BAUD RATE
The software defaults to 9600 ba ud, however this rate can be changed. To do this from the command line, type /bxxxx (xxxx = baud rate). For example: 2004pgmr /b or -b
NOTE: When the baud rate is changed on the com­mand line, the baud rate jumpers on J3 in the MPC must also be changed to the same baud rate (see Sec­tion 6.10.8).
DEMO MODE
3.1.6 COLOR OR MONOCHROME OPERA TION
The program ming software utilizes color for a color monitor and video card. However, with LCD­type displays, this may make some in format ion hard to read because the cont rast is p oor. To improve contr ast, a monochrome mode can be selected in the display mode from Utilities heading.
3.2 REPEATER PROGR AM SOFTWARE
3.2.1 INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE
When you receive the programming software, make a backup copy and store the master in a safe place. Copy the distribution disks using DOS DISK­COPY command. For example, type:
DISKCOPY A: A: (single floppy drive)
or
DISKCOPY A: B: or C: (multi-drive systems).
If you have a hard disk drive, you may want to create one or more separate directories for transceiver programming and then transfer the program disk files to those directories. To create a new directory, use the MKDIR command. For example, to create directory RADIOPRG, type:
MKDIR \RADIOPRG.
Then to make the new directory the current directory, use the CHDIR command. For example, to change to the \RADIOPRG directory, type
To view the screens for Read Setup Parms and Write Setup Parms from the Transfer menu when a repeater is not conne ct ed to t he comput er thi s opti on is used. Normally these screens are not available with­out a repeater connected. To do this from the com­mand line, type: /d or -d. For example: 2004pgmr /d
August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200
CHDIR \RADIOPRG.
To copy all files from a floppy disk in drive A: to this directory, type:
COPY A:*.*
3-2
SOFTWARE
If you have a single floppy drive an d no hard di sk drive, you need to create programming disks. The rea­son for this is that there is not adequate space on the backup disk(s) for storing radio files. If your com­puter has dual floppy disk drives, the backup disk can be placed in one drive and then the radio files stored on a disk in the second drive.
T o make a pro gramming di sk, format a blank disk using FORMAT B: or FORMAT B: /S (use "/S" if it must be a bootable disk). Then copy the required pro­gram file or files to the pro gra mmi ng di sk. To do this, type COPY A:(filename .ext) B:(filename.ext). For example, to copy the file 2004pgm2.exe from drive A to drive B, type
COPY A:2004pgm2.exe B:2004pgm2.exe
This procedure works for either single or dual drive computers. Refer to your computer reference manual for more information on these DOS commands.
The programming software is shipped in a com­pressed format. The name of the compressed file is 2000pgm2.exe and it extr acts the fo llowing fi les so the program can be used on a PC.
VHF_PGMR.EXE 488K VHF_PGMR.HLP 46K VHF12LMN.HLP 2K VHF_PGMR.LNF 181K VHF12HMN.LNF 11K VHF12LMN.LNF 278K VHF12LUS.LMF 59K VHF25HMN.LNF 11K VHF25LMN.LNF 270K VHF25LUS.LMF 62K
The 2004PGM2.EXE file is self ex tr act i ng which means that the files extract automatically when exe­cuted. To extract these files so the program can be used, first make the current directory the destination directory for these files. For example, to make it t he \RADIOPRG directory on drive C: (if not the current directory), type C: (Retur n) and then CD \RADIOPRG as just described. To make it the disk in drive B:, sim­ply type B:. Then insert the program disk in drive A: and type A:2004PGM2 (or B: 2004PRM2 if drive B: is being used). The program files are automatically extracted into the current directory or disk.
3.2.2 MINIMUM FREE MEMORY REQUIRED
Approximately 560K of free conventional mem­ory is required to run this pr ogram (us e the CHKSK or MEM command to display the amount of free mem­ory). If you have at least 640K of memory and not enough is available, there may be other programs that are also being loaded into conventional memory. Con­tact Customer Service for information on how these programs can be moved or disabled to make more space available.
3.3 REPEATER PROGR AMMER
When the program is loaded into the computer and executed, the menu shows the files available from the directory. The program is used to create, edit, transfer and receive the repeater and channel parame­ters descri bed in Sectio n 5.
IMPORTANT
The commands and displays referred to in this manual are for the IBM PC and may differ from IBM compatible. Refer to the computer’s operating system manual for command explanations.
3.3.1 PROGRAM FILES
The files in the software directory are needed to run the program.
3.4 ALIGNMENT SOFTWARE
File Edit Transfer Hardware Test Utilities
PA Receiver Exciter Full Rptr/Station RNT Interface Telephone Interface
VNC Interface

Figure 3-1 REPEATER TEST MENU

The software for the VIKING VX repeater pro­grams the MPC to open and close the audio/data gates necessary for the ali gnment selecte d from the Test-Full
3-3
August 2000
Part No. 001-2001-200
SOFTWARE
Repeater menu. Under the menu heading Test are the alignment procedures for the PA (see Section 7.3), Receiver (see Section 7.1), Exciter (see Section 7.2) and overall Full Repeater (see Section 7.4) including the MAC card (see Figure 3-1).
Refer to Section 7 for Alignment Procedures as shown in the program, alignment points diagrams and test setup d iagrams.
HELP - F1
FILE
Load Save Save As Print Config DOS Shell About... Quit ALT X
3.5 HELP F1
Help screens are available for most parameters and options in this progr am. Whenever a pa rameter or options clarification is needed, press F1 and if a help screen is available it will pop-up on the screen. Press Escape <E SC> to exit th e pop-up scre en.
Setup Parameters F4 Select Repeater
EDIT
TRANSFER
HARDWARE
TEST
UTILITIES

Figure 3-2 PROGRAMMING FLOWCHART

Alarm Configuration Repeater Type Delete Repeater
Read Setup Parms F5 Write Setup Parms F6
RF Data Revisions
PA Receiver Exciter Full Rptr/Station
COM Port Display Mode Alarm Display User Level
August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200
3-4

SECTION 4 PULL DOWN MENUS

PULL DOWN MENUS

4.1 MENU DISPLAYS

The menus available are listed at the top of the screen (see Figure 3-2). Move the cursor with the arrow keys to highli ght the men u name. Pres s Enter to view the menu and the arrow keys to scroll through the menu. Call up the highlighted selection by press­ing Enter.

4.2 FILE MENU

This menu manipulates new or existing files into directories and saves files to be called up at another time.

Figure 4-1 FILE MENU

4.2.1 LOAD
Load reads information from a stored file. The program requests the filename to be loaded into the buffer. The filename from a disk can be entered in the highlighted area. Then move the cursor d own with the arrow key and highlight "Ok" and press Enter. To select an existing file, use the arrow keys to move down the menu list and press Enter when the high­lighted file name is the file to load.
4.2.2 SAVE
This saves the edited ve rsion of an existing file loaded in the buffer under the same filename in the directory a nd deletes the old file. It loads a new file created in the Edit menu into the directory.
4.2.3 SAVE AS
This saves the edited ve rsion of an existing file loaded in the buffer under a new filename o r gives a new file created in the Edit menu a filename.
Dir c:\example\file\load File *.qx
file1.qx
Ok Cancel
Load File
..\ tmp\

Figure 4-2 LOAD FILE

4-1
Dir c:\example\file\load File *.qx
test.qx
Ok Cancel
Save File
..\ tmp\

Figure 4-3 SAVE FILE

Part No. 001-2001-200
August 2000
PULL DOWN MENUS
4.2.4 NEW
This menu selection erases all Site and Repeater information in the programmer and loads factory defaults. If the current data has been changed, select­ing File -> New provides the opportunity to save the data before loading the defaults.
4.2.5 PRINT REPEATER CONFIGURATION
Select the destination for the configurations. Printer - Prints to printer connected to P C. File - Writes printable test to selected filename.
Select which repeater data will be printed.
All Repeaters - Prints the data for all valid repeaters. Single Repeater - Prints the data for th e entered repeater number.
NOTE: A list of valid repeaters can be seen under the Edit-Select Repeater menu selection.
4.2.6 DOS SHELL
DOS shell temporarily suspends the program and returns to DOS. Directories and other DOS com­mands can be performed. To return to the program from DOS, type EXIT and press Enter.
4.2.7 QUIT (ALT X)
Quit exits t he repeater program and returns to DOS. Save all files before exiting the repeater pro ­gram.
EDIT
Setup Parameters F4
Select Repeater
Alarm Configuration
Repeater Type
Delete Repeater
Repeater Number Receive Frequency Transmit Frequency Frequency Step
TELCO Network Type Area Sync Repeater
Stand Alone CWID Time CWID Message
Local Mic ID Test Mode ID
RF Power Level
Power Source Paging Data Modem
Default Repeater Number
Input Alarms Output Alarms Cross Reference
Repeater Type
Channel Bandwidth
Frequency Range
Input Type Selection Output Type Selection Alarm Cross Reference Selection
Multi-Net LTR Universal Station UHF VHF Universal Station
12.5 kHz 25 kHz
132-150 MHz 150-178 MHz 370-480 MHz 480-512 MHz

Figure 4-4 EDIT PROGRAMMING FLOWCHART

4-2
August 2000
Part No. 001-2001-200
PULL DOWN MENUS
4.3 EDIT

Figure 4-5 EDIT MENU

This menu is used to create new files and set or change the repeater operating parameters. The file­name for the repeaters in th is file is shown in the lower left corner of the screen.
4.3.1 SETUP PARAMETERS
First see Section 4.3.4 to select repeater type to setup LTR Parameters. This menu programs the repeater parameters and options of each repeater at a site. Table 5-1 lists the parameters that are set by this screen (see Figure 5-1) and giv es a brief desc ription of each.
NOTE: The parameters are shown in the lower left of the pop-up screen for reference.
Repeater Number
Each repeater is programmed with a repeater number from 1-20. Make sure t hat t his nu mber agrees with the Home repeater number programmed in the mobiles assigned to this repeater.
Receive/Transmit Frequency
Each Repeater is programmed with a Transmit and Receive frequency that it is operating on.
Frequency Step
Using the space bar, select either: 5000 Hz or 6250 Hz for allowable frequency spacing.
To eliminate the chance of incorrect synthesizer settings arising from ambiguous frequ enc ies , make sure this setting is correct.
Telco Network Type
None is used for LTR system repeaters.
Area
This is the same as the area bit used when pro­gramming the mobiles. This bit is usually "0".
Sync Repeater
None is used for LTR system repeaters.
Stand Alone
Select if the repeater is not connected to addi­tional repeaters via the high speed data bus.
ID Validator (No t applicable at this time .) CWID Time
The time interval between transmission of the repeater’s CWID message.
CWID Message
FCC regula tions require that the stat ion call let­ters be transmitted periodically on the lowest- fre­quency repeater in the system and disabled on all the others. Morse code is used to encode these letters/ numbers for continuous-wave (CW) transmission (15 characters /numbers UPPER CASE).
Local MIC ID
The local microphone connected to the MAC jack is assigned a Group ID for transmitting when the local microphone PTT is active. This allows the Repeater to operate as a base station.
Test Mode ID
This Group ID is transmitted when the Repeater is in T es t Mode. Mobi les with th e same Group ID can communicate with the Repeater in Test Mode.
4-3
August 2000
Part No. 001-2001-200
PULL DOWN MENUS
Repeater List default Rptr 1
-------
-------
------­Rptr 30
RF Power Level
This is the d efault power level. Enter the power
level for transmit power.
NOTE: This is not the actual power out level. Other factors must be considered for true power out.
Power Source
This indicates the primary power source for the Repeater (AC/DC). If AC is selected and Battery Backup is installed, the transmitter goes to half rated power (max.) when AC fails. If DC is selected and AC fails, power output is unchanged.
Select Which Alarms To Edit Input Alarms Output Alarms Cross Reference

Figure 4-7 ALARM CONFIGURATION

Input Alarms
There are four input alarms that can be activated by external devices (see Section 6.12). These inputs can be disabled, energized or de-energized. Alarms 3 and 4 can also be analog input.
Data Modem
This is selected if the Data Modem option is installed. This option is not compatible with Paging, TIC, or VNC.
4.3.2 SELECT REPEATER
Select the repeater number to be programmed or edited from the pop-up menu (see Figure 4-6). Move the cursor with the arrow keys to highlight the repeater number and press Enter.

Figure 4-6 REPEA TER LIST

If the input is disabled , the input ala rm line is inactive. When energized and current flow is detected, the alarm is activated. When de-energized and no current flow is detected, the alarm is acti­vated. Analog inputs prov ide a det ect i on of an analog input out of limit condition. Select the Low and High Limit pair to trip an Analog Input Alarm. The High Limit must be greater in value than the Low Limit (0.0V-5.0V in 0.1V steps).
Input Alarm Configuration
Input Type Selection Description
Alarm 1 Input Type: Energized Alarm 2 Input Type: De-Energized Alarm 3 Input Type: Analog Alarm 4 Input Type: Analog Low Limit Vol tage (Input3): 1.6 Volts High Limit Voltage (Input3): 2.5 Volts Low Limit Voltage (Input4 ): 0 Volts High Limit Voltage (Input4): 1.5 Volts
Spacebar
Door 1 open Door 2 open Fuel Tank 1/2 Fuel Tank 1/4

Figure 4-8 INPUT ALARMS

4.3.3 ALARM CONFIGURATI ON
This programs the input alarm (see Figure 4-8) and output alarm (see Figure 4-9) configurations and provides a cross reference screen.
Use the arrow keys to move down the list. Use the Space bar to toggle through the parameters: Dis­abled, Active Low, Active High, for each alarm.
August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200
Output T ype Selection
Select the operation of the Output Alarm. The
available types are:
Active Open - An active alarm opens (no contact) the output lines.
Active Closed - An active alarm closes (contact) the output lines.
4-4
PULL DOWN MENUS
Output Alarm Configuration
Output Type Selection Tx ID
Alarm 1 Output Type: Active Open Alarm 2 Output Type: Active Open Alarm 3 Output Type: Active Open
Alarm Tx Rate: 0
Press F2 to Accept
Spacebar
Description
DOOR OPEN FUEL 1/2 FUEL 1/4 RF HALF POWERAlarm 4 Output Type: Active Closed
120 120
15
0

Figure 4-9 OUTPUT ALARMS

Alarm Description
This is a tex t string (up to 15 characte rs) to describe the alarm. This test string is sent via Morse code if the alarm input is programmed with a Tx ID and an output is selected in the cross reference menu (see Figure 4-10).
Transmit ID
Each of the 8-alarm outputs can be assigned a Group ID from 1-225. The default setting is 0 (zero) for disabled. This Group ID and th e Repe ater number identify an alarm that is active. This ID can be pro­grammed into a transceiver so that when the alarm is active, the alarm description is received in Morse code.
Alarm Cross Reference Selection
Select which Output Alarm is activated by each Input Alarm.
0. None
1. 1
2. 1
3. 2
4. 3
5. None
6. None
7. None
8. None 24. None 32. None 40. None
9. None
10. None
11. None
12. None
13. None
14. None
15. None
16. None
17. None
18. None
19. None
20. None
21. None
22. None
23. None
Press F2 to Accept
25. None
26. None
27. None
28. None
29. None
30. None
31. None
33. 4
34. None
35. None
36. None
37. None
38. None
39. None
41. None
42. None
43. None
44. None
45. None
46. None
47. None

Figure 4-10 ALARM CROSS REFERENC E

4.3.4 REPEATER TYPE
This screen (see Figure 4-11) selects the repeater
type (LTR signaling protocol and features):
Repeater Type VHF Channel Bandwidth 12.5/25 kHz Frequency Range 132-150/150-178 MHz
Alarm Transmit Rate
This sets the time interval for transmitting the alarm message in Morse code. If more than on e alarm is active, this is the inter-alarm time.
Cross Reference
The cross reference screen selects the output alarm that is activated by each input alarm. There are up to 48 alarms (0-47), 8 external input alarms and 40 internal alarms (s ee Table 1-2). There are eight output alarms. An alarm condition on any input can cause an output alarm. This screen configures which input alarm activates an out put alarm.
NOTE: More than one alarm condition can have the same output alarm (see Figure 4-10).

Figure 4-11 REPEATER TYPE

4.3.5 DELETE REPEATER
Select Rptr To Delete Rptr 1

Figure 4-12 DELETE REPEATER

4-5
August 2000
Part No. 001-2001-200
PULL DOWN MENUS
Program Rptr 1
Ok Cancel
4.3.6 TELEPHONE PA RAMETERS
Refer to the Telephone Interface Card manual, Part No. 004-2000-370, for information on the Tele­phone Access Parameters, Telephone Interface and TIC Calibration Data.
4.4 TRANSFER
File Edit Transfer Hardware Test Utilities
Read Setup Parms F5 Write Setup Parms F6 Read TIC Calibration Data Write TIC Calibration Data
Edit Option Keys

Figure 4-13 TRANSFER MENU

4.4.1 WRITE SETUP PARAMETERS
Programming Setup Par am eters
Count = 1

Figure 4-15 PROGRAM WRITE SETUP

4.4.2 READ SETUP P ARAMETERS
This command reads the contents of the EEPROM mem ory of a repeater and loads it into a buffer. The contents of the buffer is then displayed to show the programming of the repeater.
Read Setup Parms?
Ok Cancel
This command sends the contents of a file to the repeater and programs the EEPROM memory in the Main Processor Card (MPC ).

Figure 4-14 WRITE SETUP PARAMETERS

HSDB Monitor
HARDWARE
RX/TX Data
RF Data
Revisions Mode Select TTY Terminal

Figure 4-16 READ SETUP PARAMETERS

Reading Setup Parameters
Attempting access to Repeater

Figure 4-17 READING SETUP

Repeater (1-20) Home UID GoTo GID
Data Received From Radio Data Transmitted to Radio
RF Line Monitor
Normal Test
UID Home GID Pri Stat Time
August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200

Figure 4-18 HARDWARE PROGRAMMING FLOWCHART

4-6
PULL DOWN MENUS
4.5 HARDWARE

Figure 4-19 HARDWARE MENU

4.5.1 HSDB MONITOR
High Speed Data Bus (HSDB) connects all repeaters at a site and cont inu ally sen ds update s on the status of each repeater. This information screen pro­vides a list of all repeaters at the site (1 to 20). If a repeater is not sending data, IDLE is next to the repeater number. The data sent by the repeater is used to determine the Home, GID and UID of destination (mobile) users to receive the call placed by the originator.
The Home column refers to the Home repeater number of the originator, therefore the Repeater num­ber and the Home number may not be the same num­ber. The UID is the Unique ID used to identify the originator of special calls. The GID column refers to the Group ID of the talk group of the originator (236=UID Call, 237 Telco call). The GoTo column shows the repeater channel all destination users switch to so they receive the call.
Rptr Home UID GoTo GID

Figure 4-20 HSDB MONITOR

The repeater receives the destinati on’s: Unique ID, Home Repeater Number, Group ID, Priority, Sta­tus and Time Stamp. The information sent to the des­tination in the update message from the repeater includes: Unique ID of originator, Home Repeater Number, Group ID, GoTo Channel Number, Free Channel Nu mber and Priority of the cu rrent repeate r. The time st amp is included becaus e messages are sent continually and this provides a reference for when a data exchange took place.
UID Home GID Pri Stat Time

Figure 4-21 MOBILE TRAFFIC MONITOR

4.5.3 RF DATA
The A/D Monitor Screen shows the state of the lines (see Figure 4-22). These lines are monitored by the A to D converter in the IAC. The normal values for each line are defined as follows.
Synthesizer Lock Lines Yes or No Forward Power (LP) 25-110 Watts Reflected Power 0-6 Watts Final Out (ratio) approx equal Chassis Temp 27°C-55°C Wideband Audio Output approx 200 LO Injection approx 200 RSSI 20-150 Fan Current 100-200, 0 Fan On or Off Power Supply Temp 22°C-45°C Battery Voltage 21V-28V
4.5.2 RECEIVE/TRANSMIT DATA
This is an information screen used at the repeater site while t he computer (laptop) is connected to the MPC in the rep eater being monitored. This informa­tion is contained in the receive data stream exchanged between the repeater and the destination user (mobile) and the data content of the repeater transmit data stream. The message contains data received from the destination and data se nt to the mo bile by the r epeater.
Values with no label are the actual A to D read-
ing. To calculate the voltage on the line, divide the value by 51. Example: Value ÷ 51 = Volts. Any varia­tion from the above values may indicate a problem in that area. Values on this screen are relative measure­ments only.
August 2000
4-7
Part No. 001-2001-200
PULL DOWN MENUS
RF Line Monitor
Synthesizer Lock Lines
Exciter Synthesizer: Yes Receive Synthesizer: Yes
Transmit Parameters
Forward Power: 0 Watts Reflected Power: 0 Watts Final Output 1/2: 0/ 0 ratio Final Output 3/4: 0/ 0 ratio
Receive Parameters
RSSI: 0
System Parameters
Fan 1 Current: 0 Fan 2 Current: 0 Fan On: Off Chassis Temp: 0 C
Battery Voltage: 0 Volts
Wideband Audio Output: 0 LO Injection: 0
Power Supply Temp: 0 C
(Not Calibrated)
Exciter High Stability: No Receive High Stability: No

Figure 4-22 RF LINE MONITOR

Repeater Version Display
Repeater Number: 1
HSDB: 2.1d MAC: 1.09 TIC: 0.00
MPC or TPI: 10.12 05/23/95 11 Serial Number: 1234567891234567

Figure 4-23 REVISION/VERSION

4.5.4 REVISION/VERSION
The Revision/Version is displayed for the repeater modules in this screen. The format is R.V (revision.version) for all modules. The MPC informa­tion also includes the release date of the software and the serial number of the repeater. The HSDB version in Figure 4-23
and Figure 4-24 is the version for J4, pins 3/4 connected in the MPC.
is for J4, pins 5/6 connected in the MPC
4.5.5 MODE SELECT
The Mode Select screen plac es the repea ter eith er in the Norma l mode or the Test mode. In th e Normal mode the repeater operates as a normal repeater.
In the Test mode the repeater transmits a test word. This test word is the Test Mode ID setup in the Setup Parameters (see Section 4.3.1
).
C A U T I O N
Repeater Version Display
Repeater Number: 1
HSDB: 50.02 MAC: 1.09 TIC: 0.00
MPC or TPI: 10.12 05/23/95 11 Serial Number: 1234567891234567

Figure 4-24 REVISION/VERSION

While in the test mode the repeater is "busy", therefore it is important to place the repeater in Normal mode when the test mode is no longer required.
August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200
4-8
TEST
PA Receiver Exciter Full Rptr/Station RNT Interface Telephone Interface
All Test Repeater Setup Transmitter Tests Receiver Tests Transmit Audio/Data Voter Audio Adjust Audio/Data Adjust Repeater Operat ion
Select Line Type Adjust Links
PULL DOWN MENUS
Frequency Adjust Power Output Adjust
All Receive Tests TCXO Frequency Adjust Audio Distortion Hum & Noise Measurement SINAD Measurement Squelch Adjust Data Level Adjust Local Speaker/Mic Desense Check Miscellaneous Tests
All Transmit Tests Audio Deviati o n Lim i t Repeat Audio Level Data Level Adjust Audio/Data Deviation CWID Level Check Local Speaker/Mi c Tx Hum & Noise Ratio Transmit Audio Distortion LTR Mod em
All Audio/Data Tests Voice Audio From Repeater Voice Audio To Repeater FSK Data To Rptr (Separate Path) FSK Data To Rptr (Over Voice Path) FSK Data From RNT (Separate Path) FSK Data From Rptr (Over Voice Path) RS-232 Setup
All Operational Tests New HSDB Test Old HSDB Test Handshake Test Alarm Test Spurious Check
Data Over Voice (2-Wire) Separate Data (4-Wire) RS-2332

Figure 4-25 TEST PROGRAMMING FLOWCHART

4.6 TEST

Figure 4-26 TEST MENU

4.6.1 POWER AMPLIFIER
This menu selection walks through the alignment of the Power Amplifier and RF Interface Board on the computer screen. Refer to Section 7.3 for the PA and RFIB alignment in this manual and Figures 7- 3 and 7-8 for alignment points diagrams.
4.6.2 RECEIVER
This menu selection walks through the alignment of the receiver on the computer screen. Refer to Sec­tion 7.1 for the Receiver alignment i n this manua l and Figure 7-1 for an alignment points diagram and Figure 7-6 for a test setup of the Receiver.
4.6.3 EXCITER
This menu selection walks through the alignment of the Exciter on the computer screen. Refer to Sec­tion 7.2 for the Exciter alignme nt and Fi gure 7-2 for an alignment points diagram and Figure 7-7 for a test setup of the Exciter.
4-9
August 2000
Part No. 001-2001-200
PULL DOWN MENUS
4.6.4 FULL REPEATER
This menu selection walks through the alignment of the entire repeater. The Receiver and Exciter por­tions are performance tests and adjustments. The Audio and Data portions are level adjustments for the Main Audio Card (MAC). Refer to Figure 7-12 for an alignment points diagram for the MAC.
4.7 UTILITIES

Figure 4-27 UTILITIES MENU

4.7.1 COM PORT
This is the COM port used to send and receive data from the Repeater MPC. An interface cable con­nects the Repeater to the computer (see Figure 4-29). This screen also selects the data baud rate.
4.7.2 DISPLAY MODE
This screen allows the color mode to be selected for color monitors. When using a la ptop, monochrome is recommended for better resolution.

Figure 4-30 COLOR MODE SELECTION

4.7.3 USER LEVEL
There are two levels to choose from, Novice and Advanced. The Novice uses prompts in the Edit­Paramete rs screens wh en Escape or F2 keys are pressed that ask "are you sure" before the task is exe­cuted. The Advanced selection performs the task without asking the question.

Figure 4-28 COM PORT SELECTION

TO MPC
TO LAPTOP
Figure 4-29 LAPTOP INTERCONNECT CA-
BLE
August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200
4-10
REPEATER PROGRAMMING

SECTION 5 REPEATER PROGRAMMING

5.1 CREATING A NEW FILE

An example will be used to show the program-
ming for a new file created for Site 1.
NOTE: At any point in the programming sequence, if F1 is selected, a help screen appears to explain the menu selection highlighted at that point.

5.1.1 SELECT REPEATER TO EDIT

A repeater is selected to program. When no file exists with programmed repeaters, the default is selected and edited.

1. Highlight EDIT, press Enter.

2. Highlight SELECT REPEATER, press Enter.

3. Default is the only repeater in this list, press Enter.

4. Highlight EDIT, press Enter.

13.Type in a valid DOS filename. For this example site1.dat i s used.

14.The file consists of default and repeater one under the filename of site1.dat.

5.2 ADDING A REPEATER TO A FILE
The example used fo r Si t e 1 will again be used t o
add repeaters to the filename site1.dat.

1. Highlight EDIT, press Enter.

2. Highlight SELECT REPEATER, press Enter.

3. The repeater list shown for this file includ es defaul t and repeater one. These contain the same parame­ters with the exception that when selected for edit the programmed repeater can be over written and the data lost.

4. Highlight DEFAULT, press Enter.

5. Highlight SETUP PARAMETERS, press Enter.

6. The Setup Parameters sc reen ap pears (see Fi gure 5 -
1). Fill in the parameters for this repeater. A brief description of the parameters is in Table 5-1. Full descriptions are in Section 4.3.1.

7. Select parameters, press F2 to accept.

8. Highlight EDIT, press Enter.

9. Highlight ALARM CONFIGURATION and press Enter, if alarms are to be configured.

10.Program the Alarms to be configured (see Section
4.3.3), press F2 to accept.

11.Highlight FILES, press Enter.

12.Highlight SAVE, press Enter.

5. Highlight EDIT, press Enter.

6. Highlight SETUP PARAMETERS, press Enter.

7. Change the Repeater number and other parameters as required for this repea ter, press F2.

8. Highlight EDIT, press Enter.

9. Highlight ALARM CONFIGURATION and press Enter, if alarms are to be configured.

10.Program the Alarms to be configured (see Section
4.3.3), press F2 to accept.

11.Highlight FILES, press Enter.

12.Highlight SAVE, press Enter.

13.Repeater 2 is added to the Repeater List in file site1.dat.

5-1
August 2000
Part No. 001-2001-200
REPEATER PROGRAMMING

Table 5-1 REPEATER SETUP PARAMETERS

Parameter Response Description
Repeater Number 1-20 Each repeater is assigned a Home Repeater number from 1-20. Channel Frequency Rx:
Tx: Frequency Step 5 kHz or 6.25 kHz Allowable frequency spacing. Telco Network Type None
FSK
RS232
FSK Blank & Burst
TIC
VNC Area 0, 1 Same as value of the Area bit in the mobiles. Sync Repeater No Not used. Stand Alone Yes, No Select if the repeater is not connected to additional repeaters
ID Validator Yes, No Not used. CWID Time 0 = disabled
1-60 min CWID Message 15 characters/numbers
UPPER CASE Local MIC ID 0 = disabled (default)
1-250, 253 Test Mode ID 0 = disabled
1-250, 254 (default) RF Power Level 25-110 Power level in watts for transmit power. Power Source AC or DC The type of primary power source for the Repeater. Data Modem Yes, No Select if the Data Modem option is installed.
Each repeater is programmed with the transmit and receive fre­quency that it is operating on.
None=LTR dispatch only. Data signaling type for a Switch, FSK, RS232 or FSK B&B.
TIC is for Telephone Interface Card w/o a Switch. VNC=network telephone interconnect w/o a Switch.
(via HSDB).
Time between CWID transmissions.
Station call letters.
Group ID transmitted when the local microphone PTT is active.
Group ID transmitted when the Repeater is in the Test Mode.
Repeater Number: 1 Rcv Frequency: 158.145000 Xmit Frequency: 153.095000 Frequency Step: 5000 Hz
Sync Repeater: No Stand Alone: Yes ID Validator: N/A
Local MIC ID: 0 Test Mode ID: 254
Paging: No
Repeater Home (1-20)
August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200
LTR Repeater Setup Parameters Edit
Telco Network Type: None Area:
CWID Time: CWID Message:
RF Power Level: Power Source:
Data Modem:
Press F2 to Accept

Figure 5-1 SETUP P ARAMETERS

5-2
0
0
REDHAWK
110 AC
No

SECTION 6 CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION

6.1 RECEIVER

6.1.1 INTRODUCTION

The receiver is a double conversion type with intermediate frequencies of 52.95 MHz and 450 kHz. The first injection frequency is phase locked to a tem­perature compensated crystal oscillator (TCXO) with a frequency stability of ±2.5 PPM from -30° to +60°C (-22° to +140°F). Two 3-pole bandpass filters in the front-end reje ct signal s outs ide the r eceive ba nd. Two 4-pole crystal filters and two 4-pole ceramic filter establish receiver selectivity (see block diagram Figure 6-1).

6.1.2 REGULATED VOLTAGE SUPPLIES

The +15V DC power source is supplied by the repeater power supply. The +15V supply enters the receiver on J201, pin 1. U302 provides the +12V DC receive voltage to the RF and IF amplifiers. U303 supplies +12V DC to the first and second injection amplifiers. U304 supplies +12V DC to the remaining RF circuits. U301 suppli es +6V DC to th e remaining circuits.

6.1.4 12.5 KHZ IF First Mixer and Crystal Filter

First mixer U101 mixes the receive frequency with the first injection frequency to produce the 52.95 MHz first IF. Since high-side injection is used, the injection frequency is 52.95 MHz above the receive frequency. Jumper J203 selects between a 12.5 kHz IF and a 25 kHz IF. Install jumper plug P203 on J203, pins 2-3 to select the 12.5 kHz IF. The output of U101 is matched to Z211 at 52.95 MHz by L211, C236 and C237.
Z211A and Z211B form a two-section, four-pole filter with a center frequency of 52.95 MHz and a
-3 dB bandwidth of 8 kHz. This filter attenuates adja­cent channels and other signals close to the receive frequency. The filter sections are a matched pair and the dot on the case indicates which leads connect together. Matching with Q202 is provided by C241, L213 and C240.

6.1.3 HELICAL FILTERS, RF AMPLIFIER

The receive signal enters the receiver on coaxial connector A201. A helical filter consisting of L101, L102 and L103 is a three -pole bandpass filter tu ned to pass only a narrow band of frequencies within the 132-178 MHz band. This filter also attenuates the image and other unwanted frequenci es .
Impedance matching between the helical filter and RF amplifier U103A is provided by C102. U103A amplifies the receive signal to recover filter losses and increases receiver sensitivity. Biasing for U103A is provided by R105/R106/R107/R108 and C105, C106, C107 and C108 provide RF bypass. Additional filtering of the receive signal is provided by 3-pole helical fil ter L108- L110. C103/C104 match the output from U103A to 3-pole helical filter L108­L110.
IF Amplifier, Crystal Filter
Q202 amplifies the 52.95 MHz IF signal to recover filter and mixer losses and improve receiver sensitivity. Biasing for Q202 is provided by R236/ R233/R234/R235 and C242/C243/C246 provide RF bypass. The output of Q202 is matched to crystal fil­ter Z212 at 52.95 MHz by C245, C247 and L214.
Z212A and Z212B form a two-section, four-pole filter with a center frequency of 52.95 MHz and a
-3 dB bandwidth of 8 kHz. This filter establishes the selectivity of the receiver by further filtering the 52.95 MHz IF. The filter sections are a matche d pair and th e dot on the case indica tes which leads conne ct together . Matching with U203 is provided by C250, C251, C252, L216 and R237.
August 2000
6-1
Part No. 001-2001-200
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
BANDPASS FILTER
L102/L103/L104
RF IN
A201
RF AMP
U103A
BANDPASS FILTER
L108/L109/L110
MIXER
U101
52.95 MHz 4-POLE CRYSTAL FILTER
Z211A/B
IF AMP
Q202
52.95 MHz 4-POLE CRYSTAL FILTER
Z212A/B
17.5 MHz TCXO
Y401
MULTIPLIER
VOLTAGE MULTIPLIER
Q403, Q404
Q405, CR402
VCO
A006
Q204
BUFFER/AMP
Q131
Q132
RF DATA
RF CLOCK
SYN CS RX
SYN LK RX
SYNTHESIZER
REF IN
U401
V R
F IN
BUFFER
Q401 Q402
CHARGE PUMP
Q406, Q407 Q408, Q409
BUFFER
Q410 Q411

Figure 6-1 12.5 kHz IF RECEIVER BLOCK DIAGRAM

Second Mixer/Detector
As shown in Figure 6-2, U203 contains second oscillator, second mixer, limiter, detector and RSSI circuitry. The 52.95 MHz IF signal is mixed with a
52.5 MHz signal produced by TCXO Y401 and tripler Q204. The 17.5 MHz (±2.5 PPM) output of Y401 is fed through C275 to tripler Q204. The tripler passes the third harmonic at 52.5 MHz to the oscillator input of U203.
OSC B 1
OSC E
MIXER OUT
IF IN
DECOUPLING 1
DECOUPLING 2
QUAD COIL
MIXER
OSC
2
3
WITH HYSTER ESIS
Vcc
4
5
6
7
8
LIMITER
AMP
SQUELCH TRIGGER
AMP
FILTER
DEMODULATOR
16 MIXER IN
GROUND
15
MUTE14
RSSI
13
SQUELCH IN
12
FILTER OUT
11
FILTER IN
10
AF
AMP
AUDIO9

Figure 6-2 U201/U203 BLOCK DIAGRAM

IF DETECTOR/AMP
VCO
U203
Z213/Z214
FIRST SECOND
INJ AMP INJ AMP
Q133
Q134
U204A
AUDIO
U204B
BANDPASS
INJECTION FILTER
L140/L141
RSSI
RX WBAND
AMP
U102
INJECTION
TEST VOLTAGE
Biasing of Q204 is provided by R258, R259 and R260. RF choke L222 blocks the flow of RF through R261. An AC voltage divider formed by C280/C281 matches Q204 to the highpass filter. The third har­monic of the TCXO frequency is then used to drive the OSC B input at 52.5 MHz. L223, C282 and L224 form a high pass filter to attenuate frequencies below
52.95 MHz. C283 and C284 match the output of the filter to U2 03.
The 450 kHz second IF is then fed to ceramic fil­ter Z213/Z214, then into the IF amplifier. The center frequency of Z213/Z214 is 450 kHz with a bandwidth of 9 kHz used to attenuate wideband noise. The lim­iter amplifies the 450 kHz signal 92 dB which removes any amplitude fluctuations.
From the limiter the signal is fed to the quadra­ture detector. An external phase-shift network con­nected to U203, pin 8, shifts the phase of one of the detector inputs 90° at 450 kHz (the other inputs are unshifted in phase). When modulation occurs, the fre­quency of the IF signal changes at an audio rate as does the phase of the shifted signal. The detector, which has no output with a 90° phase shift, converts the phase shift into an audio signal. Z215 is adjusted to provide maximum undistorted output from the detector. The audio signal is then fed out on U203, pin 9.
August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200
6-2
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
RF AMP
U103A
BUFFER
Q401 Q402
CHARGE PUMP
Q406, Q407 Q408, Q409
BUFFER
Q410 Q411
BANDPASS FILTER
17.5 MHz TCXO
Y401
VOLTAGE MULTIPLIER
Q403, Q404
Q405, CR402
A006
L108/L109/L110
MULTIPLIER
Q204
VCO
BUFFER/AMP
Q131 Q132
RF IN
A201
RF DATA
RF CLOCK
SYN CS RX
SYN LK RX
BANDPASS FILTER
L102/L103/L104
SYNTHESIZER
REF IN
U401
V R
F IN

Figure 6-3 25 kHz IF RECEIVER BLOCK DIAGRAM

Wideband Audio Amplifier
U204B amplifies the detected audio and data sig­nal. R244/R245/R246 set the gain of the amplifier and R247/R248/R249/R250/RT204 provide a DC ref­erence level. C261 bypasses the 450 kHz IF signal and C262 bypasses other frequencies. The output sig­nal is adjusted by R253 and fed to J205, pin 3. Install jumper plug P205 on J205, pins 2-3 to select the
12.5 kHz audio to be routed to J201, pin 9.
RSSI Amplifier
AMPLIFIER
Q203
VCO
MIXER
52.95 MHz 4-POLE
U101
CRYSTAL FILTER
FIRST SECOND
INJ AMP INJ AMP
Q133
Z201A/Z201B
IF DETECTOR/AMP
U201
Z203/Z204
Q134
IF AMP
Q201
INJECTION FILTER
U202A
AUDIO
U202B
BANDPASS
L140/L141
52.95 MHz 4-POLE CRYSTAL FILTER
Z202A/Z202B
RSSI
RX WBAND
U102
AMP
IF and a 25 kHz IF. Install jumper plug P203 on J203, pins 1-2 to select the 25 kHz IF. The output of U101 is matched to the crystal filter at 52.95 MHz by L201, C201 and C202.
Z201A/B fo rm a two-section, four-pole filter with a center frequency of 52.95 MHz and a -3 dB bandwidth of 15 kHz. This filter attenuates adjacent channels and other signals close to the receive fre­quency. The filter is a matched pair and the dot on the case indicates which leads connec t together. Match­ing with Q201 is provided by C205, L203 and C206.
INJECTION
TEST VOLTAGE
U203, pin 13 is an output from an internal RSSI (receive signal strength indicator) circuit which pro­vides a current proportional to the strength of the 450 kHz IF signal. The RSSI output is buffered through U204A and the level is adjusted by R221. The DC output signal is then fed to J204, pin 3. Install jumper plug P204 on J204, pins 2-3 to select the 12.5 kHz RSSI to be routed to J201, pin 7.
6.1.5 25 KHZ IF
First mixer U101 mixes the receive frequency with the first injection frequency to produce the 52.95 MHz first IF. Since high-side injection is used, the injection frequency is 52.95 MHz above the receive frequency. Jumper J203 selects between a 12.5 kHz
IF Amplifier, Crystal Filter
Q201 amplifies the 52.95 MHz IF signal to recover filter and mixer losses and improve receiver sensitivity. Biasing for Q201 is provided by R204/ R201/R202/R203 and C207/C209/C211 provide RF bypass. The output of Q201 is matched to crystal fil­ter Z202A at 52.95 MHz by C210, C212 and L204.
Z202A/B fo rm a two-section, four-pole filter with a center frequency of 52.95 MHz and a -3 dB bandwidth of 15 kHz. This filter establishes the selec­tivity of the receiver by further filtering the
52.95 MHz IF. The filter sections are a matched pair and the dot on the case indicates which leads connect together. Matching with U201 is provided by C215, C216, C217, L206 and R205.
August 2000
6-3
Part No. 001-2001-200
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Second Mixer/Detector
As shown in Figure 6-2, U201 contains second oscillator, second mixer, limiter, detector and RSSI circuitry. The 52.95 MHz IF signal is mixed with a
52.5 MHz signal produced by TCXO Y401, tripler Q204 and amplifier Q203. The 17.5 MHz (±2.5 PPM) output of Y401 is fed through C275 to tripler Q204. The tripler passes the third harmonic at 52.5 MHz to amplifier Q203. Amplifier Q203 amplifies the 52.5 MHz signal for the oscillator input of U201.
Biasing of Q204 is provided by R258, R259 and R260. RF choke L222 blocks the flow of RF through R261. An AC voltage divider formed by C280/C281 matches Q204 to the highpass filter. L223, C282 and L224 form a high pass filter to attenuate frequencies below 52.95 MHz. C283 and C284 match the output of the filter t o U203. The thi rd ha rmonic o f the TCXO frequency is light ly coupled to amplif ier Q203 th rough C270, R262 and C265. Biasing of Q203 is provided by R254, R255, R256 and R257. The amplified 52.5 MHz output is passed to U201 OSC B input through C271.
The 450 kHz second IF is then fed to ceramic fil­ter Z203/Z204, then into the IF amplifier. The center frequency of Z203/Z204 is 450 kHz with a bandwidth of 15 kHz used to attenuate wideband noise. The lim­iter amplifies the 450 kHz signal 92 dB which removes any amplitude fluctuations.
RSSI Amplifier
U201, pin 13 is an output from an internal RSSI (receive signal strength indicator) circuit which pro­vides a current proportional to the strength of the 450 kHz IF signal. The RSSI output is buffered through U202A and the level is adjusted by R219. The DC output signal is then fed to J204, pin 1. Install jumper plug P204 on J201, pins 1-2 to select the 25 kHz RSSI to be routed to J201, pin 7.
6.1.6 VCO
The Voltage-Controlled Oscillator (VCO) is formed by Q101 circuitry and high-Q inductor L102. The VCO oscillates in a frequency range from 184­231 MHz. Biasing of Q101 is provided by R102, R103, R104 and R105. AC voltage divider C104, C105 and C106 initiates and maintains oscillation and matches Q101 to the tank circ uit. The high- Q inductor is grounded at one end to provide shunt inductance to the tank circu it.
The VCO frequency is controlled in part by DC voltage across vara ctor diode D101. As voltage ac ross a reverse-biased varactor diode increases, its capaci­tance decreases. Therefore, VCO frequency increases as the control volta ge increa ses. The contr ol line is RF isolated from tank circ uit by ch oke L101. The amou nt of frequency change produced by D101 is controlled by series capacitor C102.
From the limiter the signal is fed to the quadra­ture detector. An external phase-shift network con­nected to U201, pin 8, shifts the phase of one of the detector inputs 90° at 450 kHz (the other inputs are unshifted in phase). When modulation occurs, the fre­quency of the IF signal changes at an audio rate as does the phase of the shifted signal. The detector, that has no output with a 90° phase shift, converts the phase shift into an audio signal. Z205 is adjusted to provide maximum undistorted output from the detec­tor. The audio signal is then fed out on U201, pin 9.
Wideband Audio Amplifier
U202B amplifies the detected audio and data sig­nal. R212/R213/R214 set th e gain of the amplifier and R215/R216/R217/R218 and RT202 provide a DC ref­erence level. C226 bypasses the 450 kHz IF signal and C227 bypasses other frequencies. The output sig­nal is adjusted by R220 and fed to J205, pin 1. Install jumper plug P205 on J205, pins 1-2 to select the 25 kHz audio to be routed to J201, pin 6.
Q102 and Q103 form a cascade-connected buffer circuitry. DC bias is produced by R107, R108, R109 and R112. A signal oscillated at Q101 is DC cut and adjusted by C107, and fed into the buffer. An output from RF choke L104 passes through an adjustment ci r ­cuit consisting of C114 and C119.
6.1.7 ACTIVE FILTER
Q801 functions as a capacitance multiplier to pro­vide filtering of the 12V supply to Q802. R803 and R804 provide transistor bias, and C812 provides the capacitance that is effe ctive ly multiplie d by the gain of Q801. If a noise pulse or other voltage chan ge appears on the collector, the base voltage does not change because of C812. Theref ore , the base current does no t change and transistor current remains constant. R805 decouples the VCO output from AC ground. L803 is an RF choke and C810, C811, C813 and C814 provi de RF bypass.
August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200
6-4
REF
REF
CLOCK
DATA IN
ENABLE
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
DATA OUT
PORT
20
in
out
OSC OR 4-STAGE DIVIDER
1
18
19
17
SHIFT
REGISTER
AND
CONTROL
LOGIC
13-STAGE R COUNTER
DOUBLE-BUFFERED
STANDBY
6-STAGE
A COUNTER
R REGISTER
16 BITS
C REGISTER
8 BITS
LOGIC
A REGISTER
24 BITS
INTERNAL
CONTROL
POR
12-STAGE
N COUNTER
f
R
f
V
f
R
f
V
f
R
f
V
f
R
f
V
SELECT
LOGIC
AND CONTROL
PHASE/FREQUENCY
DETECTOR A
AND CONTROL
PHASE/FREQUENCY
DETECTOR B
AND CONTROL
16
OUTPUT A
2LOCK DETECT
LD
15
OUTPUT B (OPEN-DRAIN OUTPUT)
8
Rx
6
PDout
3
OR (UP)
4
OV (DOWN)
INPUT AMP
11
f
in
10
f
in
64/65
PRESCALER

Figure 6-4 SYNTHESIZER BLOCK DIAGRAM

6.1.8 BUFFER
A cascode amplifier formed by Q410/Q411 pro­vides amplification and isolation between the VCO and Synthesizer. A cascode amplifier is used because it provides high gain, high isolation and consumes only a small amount of po wer. The input signal to t his amplifier is coupled from the VCO RF output on pin 5. DC blocking and coupling to the VCO is pro­vided by C455 and to the buf fer b y C456. Bias f or the amplifier is provided by R442, R445, R446 an d R277. Q411 is a common-emitter amplifier and Q410 is a common-base with C458 and C457 providing RF bypass. L405 provides some filtering of the cascode output. R448 lowers the Q of L405. The output of the amplifier is coupled by C442/C441 to U401, pin 11.
MODULUS CONTROL
LOGIC
13
TEST 2
9
TEST 1
6.1.9 SYNTHESIZER
The inputs/outputs of synthesizer U401 are shown in Figure 6-4. The output signal from the syn­thesizer loop is the receiver first injection frequency. This signal is produced by a VCO (voltage-controller oscillator). The frequency of this oscillator is con­trolled by a DC voltage. This DC voltage is ge nerat ed by integrating the pulses from the phase detector in synthesizer chip U401.
Frequencies are selected by programming counters in U401 to divide by a certain number. This programming is provided through J201, pins 12, 18 and 20. The frequency stability of the synthesizer is established by the ±2.5 PPM sta bility of TCXO Y4 01. The output of this oscillator is stable from
-30°C to +60°C (-22°F to +140°F).
6-5
August 2000
Part No. 001-2001-200
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The VCO frequency of A401 is controlled by a DC voltage produced by integrating the phase detec­tor output pulses of U401. The phase detector senses the phase and frequency of the two input signals (f and f
) and causes the VCO contro l voltage t o increas e
R
V
or decrease if they are not the same. When the fre­quencies are the same the VCO is "locked" on fre­quency.
One input signal to the phase detector in U401 is the reference frequency (f
). This is the 1 7.5 MHz
R
TCXO frequency divided by the R (reference) counter to the channel spacing or 6.25 kHz.
The other input to the phase detector in U401 is from the VCO frequency divided down by the "N" counter and prescaler in synthesizer U401 to
6.25 kHz. The "N" counter is programmed through the synthesizer data line on J201, pin 20. U401 is pro­grammed so that the phase detector input (f cal to the reference freque ncy (f
) (6.25 kHz) when the
R
) is identi-
V
VCO is locked on the correct frequency.
The synthesizer contains the R (reference), N, and A counters, phase and lock detectors and counter programming circuitry. Frequencies are selected by programming the three counters in U401 to divide by assigned numbers. The programming of these counters is performed by circuitry in the Third Party Interface Card (TPI), wh ich is buffered a nd latched through the Interface Alarm Card (IAC) and fed into the synthesizer on J201, pin 20 to Data input port U401, pin 19.
6.25 kHz. Since the VCO is on freq uenc y (receive fre­quency plus 52.95 MHz) and no mul tiplicat ion is use d, the channel frequencies change in 6.25 kHz steps and the reference frequency (f
) is 6.25 kHz for all fre-
R
quencies selected by th is receiver.
The f
V input is produced by dividing the VCO
frequency using the prescaler and N counter in U401. The prescaler divides by 64 or 65. The divide number of the prescaler is controlled by the N and A counters in U401.
The N and A counters function as follows: both the N and A counters begin counting down from their programmed number. When the A counter reaches zero, it halts until the N counter reaches zero. Both counters then reset an d the cycle repeats. The A counter is always programmed with a smaller number than the N counter. While the A counter is counting down, the prescaler divides by 65. Then when the A counter is halted, the prescaler divides by 64.
Example:
Assume a receive frequency of 150.025 MHz. Since the VCO is 52.95 MHz above the receive fre­quency it must be 202.975 MHz. To produce this fre­quency, the N and A counters are programmed as fol­lows:
N = 507 A = 28
NOTE: Section 8.2.5 describes how the N and A counter numbers can be calculated for other channels.
Data is load ed into U401 serially on the Data input port U401, pin 19. Data is clocked into the shift registers a bit at a time by a low to high transition on the Clock input port U401, pin 18. The Clock pulses come from the MPC via the IAC to J201, pin 18.
As previously stated, the counter divide numbers are chosen so that when the VCO is operating on the correct frequency, the VCO-derived input to the phase detector (f derived input (f
V) is the same frequency as the TCXO-
R) which is 6.25 kHz.
The f
R input is produced by dividing the
17.5 MHz TCXO frequency by 2800. This division is done by the "R" counter in U401. The counter always divides by 2800 regardless of the channel frequency. This produces a reference frequency (f
August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200
) of
R
To determine the overall divide number of the prescaler and N counter, the number of VCO output pulses required to produce one N counter output pulse can be counted. In this example, the prescaler divides by 65 for 65 x 28 or 1,820 in put pul ses. It th en d ivides by 64 for 64 x (507 - 28) or 30,656 input pulses. The overall divide number K is therefore (30,656 + 1,820) or 32,476. The VCO frequency of 202.975 MHz divided by 80,476 equals 6.25 kHz which is the f input to the phase detect or. The overall divide number K can also be determined by the following formula:
K = 64N + A
Where, N = N counter divide number and A = A counter divide number.
6-6
R
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
6.1.10 BUFFER AMPLIFIER
A cascode amplifier formed by Q401 and Q402 provides amplification and also isolation between the TCXO and Synthesizer U401. A cascode amplifier is used because it provides high reverse isolation. The input signal to this amplifier is from TCXO Y401. C405 provides DC blocking. Bias for the amplifier is provided by R404, R406, R407, R408 and R409. L401 is an RF choke. RF bypass is provided by C403, C401 and C407. The output of Q401/Q402 is co upled to U401 by C432.
6.1.11 LOCK DETECT
When the synthesizer is locked on frequency, the Lock Detect output on U401, pin 2 is a logic high voltage with very narrow negati ve-going pulses. Then when the synthesizer is unlocke d, these pulses beco me much wider, the width may vary at a rate deter mined by the frequency difference of f
and fR. The lock
V
detect pulses are applied to J401, pin 14 and sent to the RF Interface on J103, pin 14 for detection and sampling in the IAC.
6.1.12 CHARGE PUMP, LOOP FILTER
The charge pump circuit charges and discharges C450, C451 and C452 in the loop filter to provide the 21V VCO control voltage (see Secti on 6.1.13). Puls es which control the charge pump are fed out of U401, pins 3/4. When both phase detector inputs are in phase, these output signals are high except for a very short period when both pulse low in phase. If the fre­quency of the f than that of the f
R input to the phase detector is higher
V input (or if the phase of f
leads fV),
R
the VCO frequency is too low. The negative-going pulses on the f wider and the f If the frequency of the f
V output (pin 4) then become much
R output (pin 3) stays essentially high.
input is greater than fR
V
(VCO frequency too high), the opposite occurs.
Q406 and Q407 are drivers which make the 5V levels and polarity of U401 phase detector outputs compatible with the high voltage supply to Q408 and Q409. Capacitors C444 and C446 momentarily bypass R432 and R437 when negative-going pulses occur. This speeds up the turn-off time of Q406 and Q407 by minimizing the effect of the base charge.
When a negative-going pulse occurs on pin 4, Q406 turns on which turns on Q408. Q408 sources current to charge up the loop filter capacitors C450/
C451, thereby increasing the VCO control line volt­age. When a negative-going pulse occurs on pin 3, Q407 turns on which turns on Q409. Q409 sinks cur­rent to discharge the loop filter capacitors C450/C451 thereby decreasing t he VCO c ont rol line voltage. The source cur rent from Q408, when it is on, equals the sink current from Q409, when it is on.
6.1.13 VOLTAGE MULTIPLIER
The 17.5 MHz from Y401 is amplified by Q401/ Q402 and passed to the reference input of synthesizer U401, pin 20. This signal is also coupled from the output of Q401/Q402 through C408 to amplifier Q403. Biasing for Q403 is provided by R410, R411 and R412. The output of Q403 is direct coupled to switching transistors Q404/Q405.
When Q405 is turned on and Q404 i f off , C409 i s grounded on the side connected to the emitter of Q405. This allows the other side of C409 to charge from the 12V supply through R414, CR402 to C409. When Q404 turns on and Q405 is off. C414 charges up to approximately 12V plus the voltage that was stored across C809 from the last cycle. The output voltage is 21V due t o voltage loss in the tr ansistor and diodes. C413 is an RF bypass and C414 charges to 21V to stabilize the voltage. The 21V output is fil­tered by C415/L403/C416 to remove the 17.5 MHz ripple. The 21V output is applied to the charge pump Q408/Q409 and the VCO control line.
6.1.14 BUFFER AMPLIFIER
A cascode amplifier formed by Q131 and Q132 provides amplification and also isolation between the VCO and Receiver RF stages. A cascode amplifier is used because it provides high reverse isolation. The input signal to this amplifier is coupled from VCO A401 by C131. C131 also provides DC blocking. Bias for the amplifier is provided by R134, R133, R138, R132, R131 and R136. L131 is an RF choke and R135 sets the RF output impedance of the cas­code. RF bypass is provided by C143, C142, C141, C140, C139, C138, C133, C134, C135 and C136. Th e output of Q131/Q132 is matched to the Receiver RF stages by a section of microstrip, C144, signal pad R139/R140/R141, C145, C146 and L133. C145 cou­ples the signal to the input of the first injection amplifier.
August 2000
6-7
Part No. 001-2001-200
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
6.1.15 FIRST AND SECOND INJECTION AM­PLIFIERS
U303 provides the +12V source for these ampli­fiers. First injection amplifier Q133 is biased by CR131, R143, R144, R145 and R146. C148, C151, C149 and C150 provide RF bypass from the DC line. L134 on the collector is an RF choke. Q133 is matched to the 50 ohm signal pad R147, R148 and R149 by lowpass filter C152/L135/C153, C154. C155, L136, L156, L137, C157 and a section of microstrip match Q134 to the 50 ohm signal pad.
Second injection amplifier/buffer Q134 is simi­lar in design to Q133. The output of Q134 is matc hed to 50 ohms by L134/C162/C163 and C164 provides DC blocking. L140/L141 are tuned to the receive fre­quency plus 52.95 MHz and passed to Mixer U101. This injection frequ ency is als o couple d throug h C165 to the injection test voltage circuit U102A. CR133, R158, R159 provide DC input to U102A, pin 3. The output of U102A, pin 1 is connected to J201, pin 13 for a receive injection test point and to the RF Interface Board on J103, pin 13.
6.2 EXCITER
6.2.1 VCO (A007)
The Voltage-Controlled Oscillator (VCO) is formed by Q101, associated circuitry and High-Q indicator L102. The VCO oscillates in a frequency range from 132-178 MHz. Biasing of Q101 is pro­vided by R102, R103 and R104. An AC voltage divider formed by C107 and C108 initiates and main­tains oscillation. C106 couples Q101 to the High-Q inductor. RF choke L103 completes the DC bias path to ground.
The VCO frequency is controlled in part by DC voltage across varactor diode D101. As voltage across a reverse-biased varactor diode increases, its capacitance decreases. Therefore, VCO frequency increases as th e contr ol vol tage inc rease s. The c ontrol line is RF isolated from tank circuit by choke L101. The amount of frequency change produc ed by D101 is controlled by series capacitor C102.
The frequency is modulated in a similar manner. The transmit audio/data signal is applied across varac­tor diode D102 to var y the VCO fr equenc y at an a udio rate. C104/C105 in serie s with D102 de termine the amount of modulation produced by the audio signal.
6.2.2 VCO BUFFER
Q102/Q103 form a cascade-connected buffer cir­cuitry. DC bias is produced by R107, R108, R109 and R1212. A signal oscillated at Q101 is DC cut and adjusted by C107 and fed into the buffer. An output from RF choke L104 passes through an adjustment circuit consisting of C114/C119.
6.2.3 VCO/TCXO FREQUENCY MODULATION
Both the VCO and TCXO a re mod ula te d i n order to achieve the required frequency response. If only the VCO was modulated, the phase detector in U403 would sense the frequency change and increase or decrease the VCO control voltage to counteract the change (at the lower audio frequencies inside the closed loop bandwidth of the synth esi zer ) . If only the TCXO frequency was modulated, the VCO would not track the higher audio frequencies (those beyond the closed loop bandwidth of the synthesizer). However, by modulating both the VCO and TCXO a flat audio response is achieved. Potentiometers R425 and R446 balance the modulating signals.
There are two 3.5V sources on the Exc it er boar d; one is a reference for the modulation amplifier to the VCO, the other is for the modulation amplifier to the TCXO.
The reference voltage on U402B, pin 5 is also on buffer U407B, pin 5 to J401, pin 9 and RFIB connec­tor J102, pin 9. The voltage leaves the RFIB on J101, pin 14 to J2, pin 27 on the backplane, to the bottom connectors via pin 7 and finally to the MAC on P100, pin 7.
August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200
6-8
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
AMP
EX MOD
LPTT
V REF EX
DATA
CLK
SYN CS EX
SYN LK EX
U407B
AMP
U404A
SYNTHESIZER
PD OUT
U403
RF IN
REF IN
R
Q403/Q404
Q406/Q407
Q414/Q415V Q416/Q417
CHARGE PUMP

Figure 6-5 EXCITER BLOCK DIAGRAM

With reference to the ground on the Exciter, the
3.5V reference stability is maintained by U126B/C/D on the MAC. The 3.5V DC passes through summing amplifier U129B and transmi t modulation gat e U1 18D to P100, pin 29 (Tx MOD). P100, pin 29 i s con nect ed to backplane connector J2, pin 8 and RFIB connector J101, pin 22 to J102, pin 13. The transmit modula­tion and 3.5V reference enter the Exciter on J401, pin 13 and are routed to U402B, pin 6. R425 sets the TCXO modulation level. The modulation signal and the 3.5V DC are applied to U402A, pin 2.
BUFFER
U402AU402B
BUFFER
U404B
VCO
BUFFER
BUFFER
TCXO
Y401
Q410/Q411 Q413
BUFFER
SWITCH
Q405
TO PAA007
AMP
established by the ±2.5 PPM sta bility of TCXO Y4 01. This oscillator is stable from -30°C to +60°C (-22°F to +140°F).
The VCO frequency of A007 is controlled by a DC voltage produced by the phase detector in U403. The phase detector senses the phase and frequency of the two input signals and c aus es the VCO control volt­age to increase or decrease if they are not the same. When the frequencies are the same, the VCO is then "locked" on frequency.
6.2.4 SYNTHESIZER
The synthesizer inputs/outputs are shown in Fig­ure 6-5. The synthesizer output signal is the transmit frequency. This signal is produced by a VCO (volt­age-controller oscillator) that is frequency controlled by a DC voltage produced by synthesizer chip U403. This DC voltage is filtered by a loop filter made up of C805, C806 and R804 in the VCO circuitry.
Frequencies are selected by programming counters in U403 to divide by a certain number. This programming is provided through J401, pins 12, 19 and 20. The frequency stability of the synthesizer is
The synthesizer contains the R (reference), N, and A counters, phase and lock detectors and counter programming circuitry.
One input signal to the phase detector in U403 is the reference frequency (f
R). This frequency is the
17.5 MHz TCXO frequency divided by the reference counter to the frequency step or 6.25 kHz. The other input signal (f
V) is the VCO frequency divided by the
"N" counter in U403. The counters are programmed through the synthesizer data line on J401, pin 20. Each channel is programmed by a divide number so that the phase detector input is identical to the refer­ence frequency (f
R) when the VCO is locked on the
correct frequency.
August 2000
6-9
Part No. 001-2001-200
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Frequencies are selected by programming the three counters in U403 to divide by assig ned numbers. The programming of these counters is performed by circuitry in the Third Party Interface (TPI), buffered and latched through the In terface Alarm Card (IAC) and fed into the synthesizer on J401, pin 20 to Data input port U403, pin 19.
Data is load ed into U403 serially on the Data input port U403, pin 19 when U403, pin 17 is low. Data is cloc ked into the shift registe rs a bit at a time by a low to high transition on the Clock input port U403, pin 18. The Clock pulses come from the MPC via the IAC to J401, pin 19.
As previously stated, the counter divide numbers are chosen so that when the VCO is operating on the correct frequency, the VCO-derived inpu t to the phase detector (f derived input (f
V) is the same frequency as the TCXO-
R). The fR input is produced by divid-
ing the 17.5 MHz TCXO frequency by 2800. This produces a reference frequency (f
R) of 6.25 kHz.
Since the VCO is on frequency and no multiplication is used, the freq uencies are c hanged in 6. 25 kHz steps. The reference frequency is 6.25 kHz for all frequen­cies selected by this Exciter.
The f
V input is produced by dividing the VCO
frequency using the presc al er and N count er in U403 . The prescaler divi des by 64 or 65. The divid e n umber of the prescaler is controlled by the N and A counters in U403. The N and A counters function as follows:
Both the N and A counters begin counting down from their programmed number. When the A counter reaches zero, it halts until the N counter reaches zero. Both counters then reset and the cycle repeats. The A counter is always programmed with a smaller number than the N counter. While the A counter is counting down, the prescaler divides by 65. Then when the A counter is halted, the prescaler divides by 64.
Example: To illustrate t he operation of these counters, assume a transmit frequency of 150.250 MHz. Since the VCO is the channel frequency for transmit this frequency is used. To produce this fre­quency, the N and A counters are programmed as fol­lows:
N = 375 A = 40
To determine the overall divide number of the prescaler and N counter, the number of VCO output pulses required to prod uce one N counter output pulse can be counted. In this example, the pres cal er divi des by 65 for 65 x 40 or 2,600 input pulses. It then divides by 64 for 64 x (375 - 40) or 21,440 input pulses. The overall divide number K is therefore (21,440 + 2,600) or 24,040. The VCO frequency of
150.250 MHz divided by 24,040 equals 6.25 kHz which is the f
R input to the phase detecto r . The ove rall
divide number K can also be determined by the fol­lowing formula:
K = 64N + A
Where, N = N counter divide number and A = A counter divide number.
NOTE: Section 8.2.5 describes how the N and A counter numbers can be calculated for other channels.
6.2.5 BUFFER AMPLIFIER
A cascode amplifier formed by Q403 and Q404 provides amplification and isolation between the TCXO and Synthesizer U403. A cascode amplifier is used because it provides high gain, high reverse isola­tion and consumes only a small a mount of power. The input signal to this amplifier is coupled from TCXO Y401, pin 5 by C420. C420 also provides DC block­ing. Bias for the amplifie r is pro vided by R430, R431, R432, R433 and R428. L402 is an RF choke. RF bypass is provided by C416, C418 and C419. The output of Q403/Q404 is coupled to U403, pin 20 by C417.
6.2.6 BUFFER AMPLIFIER
A cascode amplifier formed by Q406 and Q407 provides amplification and also isolation between the VCO and Synthesizer U403. A cascode amplifier is used because it provides high gain, high isolation and consumes only a small amount of power. The input signal to this amplifier is coupled from VCO A007, pin 6 by C433. C433 also provides DC blocking. Bias for the amplifier is provided by R450, R451, R453, R454 and R455. L403 is an RF choke. RF bypass is provided by C430, C431 and C479. The output of Q406/Q407 is coupled to U403, pin 11 by a non-polarized capacitor formed by C429/C499.
August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200
6-10
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
6.2.7 LOCK DETECT
When the synthesizer is locked on frequency, the Lock Detect output on U403, pin 2 is a high voltage with narrow negative-going pulses. When the synthe­sizer is unlocked, the negative-going pulses are much wider, the width may vary at a rate determined by the frequency difference of f
V/fR.
The locked or unlocked condition of the synthe­sizer is filtered by R440/C423 and appl ied to J401, pi n 16, then sent to the RF Interface on J102, pin 16 for detection.
6.2.8 CHARGE PUMP, LOOP FILTER
The charge pump circuit charges and discharges C519, C520 and C521 in the loop filter to provide the 12V VCO control voltage (see Secti on 6.1.12). Puls es which control the charge pump are fed out of U403, pins 3/4. When both phase detector inputs are in phase, these output signals are high except for a very short period when both pulse low in phase. If the fre­quency of the f than that of the f
R input to the phase detector is higher
V input (or if the phase of f
leads fV),
R
the VCO frequency is too low. The negative-going pulses on the f wider and the f If the frequency of the f
V output (pin 4) then become much
R output (pin 3) stays essentially high.
input is greater than fR
V
(VCO frequency too high), the opposite occurs.
Q414 and Q415 are drivers which make the 5V levels and polarity of U403 phase detector outputs compatible with the high voltage supply to Q416 and Q417. Capacitors C523 and C517 momentarily bypass R494 and R498 when negative-going pulses occur. This speeds up the turn-off time of Q414 and Q415 by minimizing the effect of the base charge.
6.2.9 BUFFER AMPLIFIER
A cascode amplifier formed by Q410/Q411 pro­vides amplification and also isolation between the VCO and exciter RF stages. A cascode amplifier is used because it provides high gain, high isolation and consumes only a small amount of power. The input signal to this amplifier is t appe d fr om VCO A007, pin 4 by C441. C441 also provid es DC block ing. Bias fo r the amplifier is provided by R464, R465, R466, R467 and R468. L406 is an RF choke and R483 lowers the Q of the coil. RF bypass is provided by C434, C442, C445, C443, C444 and C480. The output of Q410/ Q411 is matched to the Exciter RF stages by a section of microstrip, C446, signal pad R459/R460/R461, C498, C450 and L408.
6.2.10 RF AMPLIFIERS
RF amplifier Q413 is biased by CR403, R477, R478, R479 and R480. C508 provides RF bypass from the DC line and R479/R480 provide supply volt­age isolation. L 41 1 i s an RF choke t o the suppl y line. Q413 is matched to 50 ohms by low pass filter C509/ L412/C510 and C465 provides DC blocking. The RF output of the Exciter is on coaxial connector J402 to the Power Amplifier.
6.3 1 10W POWER AMPLIFIER
6.3.1 AMPLIFIER/PREDRIVER
RF input to the PA from the Exci ter is through a coaxial cable and conn ector to WO511. C501 couples the RF to signal pad R501/R502/R503 that connects the input to 0.3W pre-driver Q501. R504, R505 and R506 provide DC bias to the gate of Q501. C506, C507 and C508 provide RF bypass from the DC sup­ply line. L503 is an RF choke . C510 and C522 pro vide RF bypass. C511/L504/C512/C513 match Q501 out­put impedance to U501 input impedance. U502 pro­vides Q501 with DC voltage regulated at 8V.
When a negative-going pulse occurs on pin 4, Q414 turns on which turns on Q416. Q416 sources current to charge up the loop filter capacitors C519/ C520, thereby increasing the VCO control line volt­age. When a negative-going pulse occurs on pin 3, Q415 turns on which turns on Q417. Q417 sinks cur­rent to discharge the loop filter capacitors C519/C520 thereby decreasing t he VCO c ont rol line voltage. The source current from Q416, when it is on, equals the sink current from Q417, when it is on.
6.3.2 DRIVER
U501 is a 12W amplifier operating in the 132­178 MHz range. The RF is applied to the input of the splitter and to the finals.
Power control is connected to WO505 from the RF Interface board (RFIB). RF is filtered from the control voltage line by various capacitors to U501, pin 2. This control voltage regulates the RF output of the amplifier on U501, pin 5 to approximately 10W.
August 2000
6-11
Part No. 001-2001-200
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
FINAL 1 CURRENT
DRIVER CURRENT
RF IN
POWER CONTROL
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
FINAL 2 CURRENT
PRE-DRIVER
Q501
U502 AMP
U509
DRIVER
U501
TEMP SENSE
U507U506A

Figure 6-6 110W POWER AMPLIFIER BLOCK DIAGRAM

6.3.3 FINAL AMPLIFIERS
Q502 and Q503 are combined 60W amplifiers. The 10W RF input from the dri ver U501 is applied to a 7 0.7 ohm Wilkinson splitter and then to the gate of each MOSFET amplifier. The 60W outputs on the drain of the amplifiers are combined using a Wilkinson combin­er . Q502 has a half-wave tr ansmissionline on the input and Q503 has a half -wave on the output. These T-lines are used to dr ive the 60W amplifie rs o ut of ph ase. The output of the combiner is fed from WO513 directly to the forward/reverse power detect board.
The Wilkinson splitter and combiner provide the capability to split the drive input and combine the final outputs while maintaining isolation between the two final amplifiers. The combiner consists of two quarter-wave transmission lines and a balancing resis­tor. During normal op eration, a signal of relatively equal phase and amplitude is present on both ends of the balancing resis tor . Therefo re, no current fl ows and no power is dissipated in the balance resistor. If one final failed, the other final of a pair would continue to function.
6.3.4 POWER DETECTORS
The supply current is monitored through a resis­tor that creates a current output level indicative of the power output. The outputs of U503, U504 and U505 are monitored by the Universal Station software
U503
Q502
FINAL 1
FINAL 2
Q503
U504
U601A/B
FORWARD
POWER
LPF RF OUTPUT
RF LOAD
U651A/B
REVERSE
(REFLECTED)
POWER
through the RF Interface Board. If a final amplifier fails, the software will reduce the output power to pre­vent over-driving the remaining final amplifier.
6.3.5 THERMAL SENSOR
Thermal protection is provided by temperature
sensor U507. The operating range of the sensor is from -30° C to 100° C (-22° F to 212° F). Amplifier U506A sends the output of U507 through WO509 to the RF Interface Board. The RF Interface Board reduces the power amplifier to half po wer (via the MPC) if the temperature reading is too high and turns the fan on and off (not via the MPC). The fan is turned on at approximately 50°C and off again at 42°C.
6.3.6 FORWARD/REVERSE POWER DETECT, CIRCULATOR, LOW-PASS FILTER
The power amplifier output is directly coupled to the forward/reverse power detect board via a jumper. The output then enters the circulator and exits to the low-pass filter board and the antenna jack for a mini­mum power output of 110W at the default setting. If an antenna is not connected, the circulator connects the output power to R685.
Forward and reverse power are electromagneti­cally coupled from the input and reflected ports of the circulator. R663/R680 calibrate the forward and reverse sense levels. The sensed levels are coupled to the RF Interface Board a nd software .
August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200
6-12
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
6.4 RF INTERFACE BOARD
The RF Interface Board (RFIB) connects the Receiver, Exciter and Power Amplifier to the back­plane and power supply (see Figure 6-7).
The input and output connectors for the RF Inter­face Board are defined as follows.
6.4.1 POWER CONNECTOR
The power supply is connected to the RF Inter­face Board when the RF module is inserted into the station cabinet (see Figure 10-2). The jack portion of the connection is on the RF Interface Board, the plug portion is attached to the station cabinet.
P101/P102 +26.5V DC - Supply voltage to PA. +26V ±1%, 20A at 110W.
P103 +15V DC - Supply voltage to Exciter, Receiver and Power Control. 15V ±1%, 5.5A max.
P104/P105 GROUND - Ground return for the RF as­sembly.
6.4.2 SIGNAL CONNECTOR (J101)
This is the sign al inte rface con nector (36 pin) that connects the RFIB to the backplane connector J2 (34 pin) through cable assembly A8.
Pin 1 GROUND
Pins 5-6 UNUSED
Pin 7 RX WBAND
The wide band audio is from the receive audio demodulator U202 and goes to the MAC in the Con­troller card cage. The typical amplitude is 387 mV RMS (-6 dBm) and 2V DC with Standard TIA Test Modulation into the receiver. Little wave shaping is done on the receiver board other than a 31 kHz RC LPF which strips off the 450 kHz IF. Buffering is done with an op-amp.
Pin 8 RF DATA A
Data A (U105, pin 11) is the least significant bit (LSB) in the 3 multiplex chips located on the RFIB. This pin is a CMOS input from the Controller requir­ing a logic high for activation.
Pin 9 RF DATA C
Data C (U105, pin 9) is the most significant bit (MSB) in the 3 multiplex chips located on the RFIB. This pin is a CMOS input from the Controller requir­ing a logic high for activation.
Pin 10 RF MUX2 INH
The Multiplexer-2 Inhibit (U106, pin 6) is a CMOS input from the Controller that inhibits (dis­ables) the output from the RF 2 Multiplexer with a logic high.
Pin 1 carries ground current between the RF
Interface board and Backplane board.
Pin 2 PC STR
Pin 2 is the power Control Strobe. This is nor­mally low until after the power control data is shifted into the pow er control register. Then the strobe line goes high and back to low. The clock or data lines cannot be changed until after the strobe is set.
Pin 3 HS CS EX
Pin 3 is not used at this time.
Pin 4 GROUND
Pin 4 carries ground current between the RF Interface board and Backplane board.
Pin 11 RF CLK
The clock will control the synthesizer chip and power control circuit when loadi ng. This pin is a TTL input from the Controller.
Pin 12 HS CS RX
Pin 12 is not used at this time.
Pin 13 RF MUX1 INH
The Multiplexer-1 Inhibit (U105, pin 6) is a CMOS input from the Controller that inhibits (dis­ables) the output from the RF 1 Multiplexer with a logic high.
August 2000
6-13
Part No. 001-2001-200
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Pin 14 V REF EX
This is the 3.5V reference to the Exciter TCXO.
3.5V from the Exciter is passed from J102, pin 9 to this pin and the backplane. The voltage then passes through the MAC and back to the backplane to J101, pin 22 with the TX MOD. These are connected to J102, pin 13 back to the Exciter.
Pins 15-18 UNUSED
Pin 19 RF MUX3 INH
The Multiplexer-3 Inhibit (U104, pin 6) is a CMOS input from the Controller that inhibits (dis­ables) the output from the RF 3 Multiplexer with a logic high.
Pin 20 LPTT
The Logic Push-To-Talk is an open collector from the Controller. It has a sink capability of 20 mA and a maximum voltage rating of 18V. The transmitter should produce power when this pin is a logic low.
Pin 21 SYN CS EX
This input goes low to enable the loading of data into the exciter synthesizer chip U403.
Pin 22 TX MOD
The audio from the MAC in the Controller pro­cesses a number of inputs to the station to produce the signals on this pin . This sig nal goes thr ough th e RFIB and then to the Exciter. A 707 mV RMS sine wave (2V P-P) at 1 kHz produces 60% of system deviation in the transmitter. The source impedance is low and the input impedance is less than 10k ohms.
Pin 23 GROUND
Pin 23 carries ground current between the RFIB and Chassis Backplane.
Pin 24 UNUSED
Pin 25 LOGIC CONTROL TO FANS
Pin 26 RF DATA B
The Data B (U105, pin 10) is the middle signifi­cant bit in the three multiplex chips located on the RFIB. This pin is a CMOS i nput from the Controller requiring a logic high for activation.
Pin 27 A D LEVEL
20 lines (of the possible 24) of RF functions sam­pled are multiplexed to the Controller through this pin using three multiplex chips.
RF Forward Power Sense
RF Power Sense Device 1
RF Power Sense Device 2
RF Power Sense Device 3
RF Power Sense Device 4
RF Reflected Power Sense
PA Temperature
Transmit Audio Modulation
High Stability Exciter Lock Detector
Exciter Lock Detector
Receiver Detector Audio
Receive Signal Strength Indicator
Receiver Injection Level
High Stability Receive Lock Detector
Receiver Lock Detector
Fan Current 1
Fan Current 2
Fan 1 On Sense
Power Supply Temp
Battery Voltage
Pin 28 RF DATA
A data pin with TTL levels from the Controller which has the dual role of loading the synthesizer chips and adjusting the power control D /A lines for proper output power. Up to four synthesizer ch ips an d a shift-register could be connected to this pin.
Pin 29 SYN CS RX
This input goes low to enable the loading of data into the receiver synthe sizer chip U401.
Pin 25 is in parallel with the temperature sensor.
August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200
6-14
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Pin 30 RSSI
This pin is the Rec eive Sign al S trengt h Indicatio n to the Controller. This RSSI is used for tune-up of the Receiver front-end during factory test mode. The dynamic range is 60 dB. It has an output from an op­amp with the voltage going from 0.5V to 4.5V. The level has an adjustment in the Receiver.
Pin 31 GROUND
Pin 31 carries ground current between the RFIB and Chassis Backplane.
Pins 32-36 UNUSED
6.4.3 FAN CONNEC TOR (J104)
The outputs to the fan connectors are 4-pin plug­in terminals that supply DC voltage. The plug on the fan is a 2-pin connector. The plug-in terminals are located on the back of the RFIB.
WO 116 +26.5V DC
This capacitive feedthrough pin is at +26.5V DC and carries the PA current, 25A nominal at 1 10W from P102 to the Power Amplifier board.
WO 117 +26.5V DC GROUND
This capacitive feedthrough pin carries ground current from P105 to the Power Amplifier board. It must be capable of carrying up to 25A.
W118 +15V DC
This capacitive feedthrough pin connects +15V DC P103 to t he PA, Exciter, and Forward/Reverse Power Detect boards. Maximum current handling is 6A (4A nominal at 110W).
WO 119 NOT USED
Pin 1 FAN 1 LOW
Pin 1 is the ground return for Fan 1.
Pin 2 FAN HI
Pin 2 carries the voltage to Fan 1. The current is
1/4A nominal at 20V to 30V. This pin goes high when the PA heat sensor rises above 50°C and goes low below 45°C.
Pin 3 FAN2 LO
Pin 3 is the ground return for Fan 2.
Pin 4 FAN HI
Pin 4 carries the voltage to Fan 2. The Voltage is
20V-30V at 1/4A nominal. Pin 4 goes high when the PA heat sensor rises above 50°C and goes low below 45°C.
6.4.4 POWER AMPLIFIER CONNECTIONS
WO 115 POWER SENSE
This capacitive feedt hrough pi n is at +15 V DC to
the Power Detect Board.
WO 120 CTRL OUT
This capacitive f eedthroug h pin carries t he output of the power control driv er on the RFIB to the power control pin of the power module on the Power Ampli­fier board. The voltage varies from 0V-15V with cur­rent as high as 0.5A.
WO 121 FWD PWR
This capacitive feedthr ough pin is the forward power sense line. It is a voltage source that is a func­tion of the output power of the Power Amplifier. The voltage level will be between 0V-5V and drive a 10k ohm load. A typical voltage of 3V corr elate s to 110W out of the PA. This line goes through the mult iplexers and A D LEVEL line to the Controller for processing.
WO 122 RF OUT 1
This capacitive feedthrough pin is a voltage source that is a func ti on of the output power of U50 1. The voltage level will be between 0V-5V and drives a 10k ohm load. This l ine goes through t he mult iplexers and A D LEVEL line to the Controller for processing.
6-15
August 2000
Part No. 001-2001-200
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
WO 123 RF OUT 2
This capacitive feedthrough pin is a voltage source that is a function of the output power of Q501. The voltage level will be between 0V-5V and drive a 10k ohm load. This l ine go es th roug h the multipl exers and A D LEVEL line to the Controller for processing.
WO 124 RF OUT 3
This capacitive feedthrough pin is a voltage source that is a function of the output power of Q502. The voltage level will be between 0V-5V and drive a 10k ohm load. This l ine go es th roug h the multipl exers and A D LEVEL line to the Controller for processing.
WO 125 RF OUT 4
This capacitive feedthrough pin is a voltage source that is a function of the output power of Q503. The voltage level will be between 0V-5V and drive a 10k ohm load. This l ine go es th roug h the multipl exers and A D LEVEL line to the Controller for processing.
WO147 RF DETECT DRIVER
This senses power out of the driver. It is used to limit the power out of the driver to 0.4 dB over 110W at room temperature.
WO143 +26V DC
This is the +26.5V DC source to the RFIB from P101.
WO144 +15V DC
This is the +15V DC source to the RFIB from P103.
WO145 GROUND
W145 carries ground current from P104 to the RFIB.
6.4.5 EXCITER CONNECTOR (J102)
WO 126 REFL PWR
This capacitive feedthrough pin is the reflected power sense line. It is a voltage indicative of the power reflected due to a mismatch. The voltage pro­duced will typicall y be such tha t less th an a 3:1 VSWR will not trigger alarms and when VSWR = 6:1 the con­troller will reduce powe r. The voltage level wil l be between 0V-5V and drive a 10k ohm load. This line goes through the multipl exe rs an d A D LEVEL line to the Controller for processing. The time to sense and reduce the power takes several seconds.
WO 127 TEMP
This capacitive feedthrough pin is the tempera­ture sense l ine of the Power Amplifier. It will be a lin­early variable function of temperature ranging from 0V-5V output and 0°C to +100°C (+32°F to 212°F) input when driving a 10k ohm load. The primary functions of this line are for fan on/off and PA power reduction. The fan should be turned on at 50°C and off at 45°C. The PA should have power reduced when 90°C (194°F) is reached a nd with absolute turn-off at 95°C (203°F). This line goes through the multiplexers and A D LEVEL line to the Controller for processing.
The connector from the E xciter (J401) to the RF Interface board (J102) links the Exciter to the MPC in the Controller Backplane.
Pin 1 VCC1
The voltage on this pin is a fused +15V ±1%, nominal current of 0.5A. It provides current to the Exciter from the RFIB.
Pins 2-8 GROUND
Pin 9 +3.5V DC
Pin 9 is the +3.5V DC TCXO reference voltage from the Exciter to the MAC.
Pin 10 GROUND
Pin 11 LPTT
The Logic Push-To-Talk (LPTT) is an open col­lector from the Controller. It has a sink capability of 20 mA nominal and a volta ge rating of 18V maximum. The transmitter sho uld produce power when t hi s p in is a logic low.
August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200
6-16
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Pin 12 SYN CS EX
Pin 12 is the Exciter synthesizer chip select. It allows data input t o t he s ynthesizer chip when the l in e is pulled to a logic low.
Pin 13 TX MOD
The audio from the MAC in the Controller pro­cesses a number of inputs to the station per the TIA specifications to produce the signal on this pin. This signal goes through the RFIB to the Exciter. A 707 mV RMS (2V P-P) sine wave at 1 kHz provides 60% of system deviation in the transmitter. The DC volt­age on the line is 3.5V ±0.1V. The source impedance should be low (output of an op-amp or analog switch < 200 ohms) and the input impedance will not be less than 10k ohms.
Pins 14-15 GROUND
These pins carry ground current between the RFIB and th e Exciter boa rd.
Pin 16 SYN LK EX
Pin 16 is the Exciter synthesizer lock detector output. Th e synthesizer is locked with a TTL l ogic high state.
Pin 17 HS LK EX
Pin 17 is not used at this time.
Pin 18 HS CS EX
This input is not used at this time.
Pin 19 RF CLK
put power. The data has TTL levels. Up to four syn­thesizer chips and a shift register could be connected to this pin.
6.4.6 RECEIVER CONNECTOR (J103)
The connector from the Receiver (J201) to the RF Interface board (J103) links the Receiver to the MPC in the Controller Backplane.
Pin 1 VCC1
Pin 1 is fused +15V ±1% with a nominal current of 1A provides current from the RFIB to the Receiver.
Pins 2-6 UNUSED
Pin 7 RSSI
This pin is the Receive Signal Strength Indicator (RSSI) to the Controller. The RSSI is used for tune­up of the Receiver front-end during test mode. The dynamic range is 60 dB. Output is from an op-amp with the voltage going from 0.5V to 4.5V. The level has an adjustment in the Receiv er (see Secti on 6.1.4 o r
6.1.5).
Pin 8 UNUSED
Pin 9 RX WBAND
The receive wide band audio i s fr om the demodu­lator and goes to the Main Audio Card (MAC) in the Controller card cage. The typical amplitude is 387 mV RMS (-6 dBm) and 2V DC with Standard TIA Test Modulation into the Receiver. Little wave shap­ing is done on the Receiver board other than a 31 kHz RC LPF which strips off the 450 kHz IF. Buffering is done with an op-amp which can drive a 10k ohm load.
The clock controls the Exciter synthesizer when loading. The input source in the Controller is TTL with the speed determined by the synthesizer chip. There could be as many as four synthesizers and a shift register.
Pin 20 RF DATA
Pin 20 is a data pin from the Contr oller which has the dual role of loading the synthesizer chip and adjusting the power control D/A lines for proper out-
Pin 10 UNUSED
Pin 11 GROUND
Pin 11 carries ground current between the RFIB
and the Receiver board.
Pin 12 SYN CS RX
Pin 12 is the Receiver synthesizer chip select. This chip is the same part as used in the E xciter. A low enables loading the Synthesizer.
6-17
Part No. 001-2001-200
August 2000
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Pin 13 RX INJ
This pin is the power sense for the Receiver injection. It is a linear voltage source that is a func­tion of the injection power. The voltage level will be between 0V - 5V and be able to drive a 10k ohm load.
Pin 14 SYN LK RX
Pin 14 is the main synthesizer lock detector out­put for the Receiver. The synthesizer is locked with a TTL logic high state.
Pin 15 GROUND
Pin 15 carries ground current between the RFIB and the Receiver board.
Pin 16 HS CS RX
Pin 16 is not used at this time.
Pin 17 GROUND
Pin 17 carries ground current between the RFIB and the Receiver board.
Pin 18 RF CLK
The clock controls the Receiver synthesizers when loading. The input source in the Co ntroller is TTL with the speed determined by the synthesizer chip.
Pin 19 HS LK RX
Pin 19 is not used at this time.
Pin 20 RF DATA
Pin 20 is a data pin from the Controll er which has the dual role of loading the synthesizer chips and adjusting the power control D/A lines for proper out­put power. The data has TTL levels. Up to four syn­thesizer chips and a shift register could be connected to this pin.
August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200
6-18
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
PC STR
RF MUX3 INH
VREF EX
LPTT
RF MUX1 INH
A D LEVEL RF DATA C RF DATA B RF DATA A
TX MOD
STN CS EX
HS CS EX
RF MUX2 INH
RSSI
RX WB AUDIO
RF DATA
RF CLK
SYN CS RX
HS CS RX
FAN HIGH
FAN 1 LOW
FAN HIGH
FAN 2 LOW
J1
2
Q101
19
WO103
14
MUX/RES
STR SER CLK
OE
E A0 A1 A2 Z
U103
MUX 3
U104
Q8 Q7 Q6 Q5 Q4 Q3 Q2 Q1
Y0 Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4 Y5 Y6
U109A
FORWARD
POWER
U102A
U112A
U112C
U109D
RF POWER CONTROL
U102B
COMPARATOR
Q108 Q111B
U112B
U112D
U109B
POWER ADJUST
Q102-Q105
+26V
+15V
P101 P102 P103 P104 P105
PA
PWR CNTRL RF DET (PRE-DRIVER) FORWARD POWER FINAL 1 POWER FINAL 2 POWER FINAL 3 POWER FINAL 4 POWER REFLECTED POWER TEMPERATURE
EXCITER
20
MUX 1
13 27
9
26
8
22 21
3
10
30
7 28 11 29 12
J104
2
1
4
3
FAN 1 BUFFER
U107A
FAN 2 BUFFER
U107B
E
Z
U105
A2 A1
Y0
A0
Y2 Y1
Y7 Y6
MUX 2
Y0Z
A2
Y1
U106
A1
Y2
A0
Y7
E
Y5
Y4
+15V
U110E
U110B
Q106Q107
5V REGULATOR
U101
U110F
U110A
U108A
+5V
LPTT
VREF EXWO135
SYN LK EX HS LK EX RF CLK RF DATA TX MOD SYN CS EX HS CS EX
RECEIVER
RX INJ HS LK RX SYN LK RX
RSSI RX WBAND RF DATA RF CLK SYN CS RX HS CS RX

Figure 6-7 RF INTERFACE BOARD BLOCK DIAGRAM

6-19
August 2000
Part No. 001-2001-200
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
6.5 800W POWER SUPPLY
WARNING
This power supply cont a ins vol t age pot ential s grea ter than 400V. Considering the dangerous voltages and the complexity of the switch-mode power supply, it is strongly recommended the power supply be returned to E.F. Johnson for repair (see Section 1.7).
6.5.1 FILTER BOARD
AC power is brought into the power supply through the IEC connector in the front of the power supply (see Figure 2-8). This connector is attached to the EMI filter assembly, Part No. 023-2000-820. The filter contains common mode and differential mode filtering such that the supply complies with FCC Class-A regulations. In addition to the filter compo­nents (C1, C2, L1, C3, C4, L2, C5) R1 is used to dis­charge the filt er capacitors when AC is re moved. Metal-oxide varistors (RV001/RV002) are placed across the line on the input a nd outpu t of the EMI f ilter that clamp transient s on the AC li ne to prev ent damage to the power supply. The AC power i s fused with F001 after the connect or and bef ore th e filt er. Replace fuse with a 15A/250V (314015) fuse.
C111. The resistor network connected to CR104 charges up C106/C107 to +18Voff the line. This pro­vides the bias voltage required to start the controller IC U102. Once the IC turns on current is being switched on L107. A small tap winding on L107 pro­vides sustaining curr ent to the U102 . When AC is first connected it could ta ke several seconds for C106/C107 to charge to +14V before the u nit starts.
U102 samples the input voltage through R105/ R106/R107; the input current through T103/T104/ CR146/CR108/R113/R114; and the output voltage through the divider at R127 . U102 modulates t he du ty cycle to MOSFET Q101 such that the input current is shaped like and in phase with the input voltage. The controller has two feedback loops; a voltage loop to keep the 400V constant and a current loop to keep input current correct. Compensation for the current error amp is C120/R141/C121 on U102, pin 1. Com­pensation for the voltage error amp is provided by C127/C142/C126 on U102, pin 16. U102, pin 4 and associated circuitry au tomatically adjust the Power Factor Correction (PFC) for input voltage (100-240V AC), line frequency (50-60 Hz) and l o ad on the po wer factor.
NOTE: The output vol tage of the power f act or section is at 400V DC. This voltage is bled off slowly. After turning off, it can take more than 5 minutes to dis­charge.
At the output of the filter board is a bridge recti­fier. The rectifier is heat sunk to the filter bracket through a Grafoil thermal interface pad. Filtered AC power is connected to the main board via wires W001 and W003. Filter and rectified current is brought to the main board via wires W0 04 and W005. The sa fety ground is connected from the filter board to a stud in the chassis through W002.
6.5.2 POWER FACTOR CORRECTION
The power factor switching frequency is set at
87.5 kHz, ±5 kHz. The average current mode boost converter is comprised of L107, Q101, CR145, C110, C111. Half of U102 is used for power factor correc­tion. RT101/RT102 are negative temperature coeffi­cient thermistors that limit the in-rush current to C110/
August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200
6.5.3 MAIN PULSE WIDTH MODULATOR
The +26.5V output is created from a two-transis­tor forward converter Q116/Q118. It uses the 400V output of the power factor correction on C110/C111 for an input voltage. The same controller IC (U102) drives the +26.5V stage. This stage runs at exactly twice the power factor correction frequency and uses trailing edge modulation. The pulse width modulator uses the PFC supplied current for modulation scheme that reduces ripple current in C110/C111.
The output of the IC, U102, pin 11 is fed to a level shifting gate drive network comprised of C139, C140, T106, C136, C197, C137 and C228. Each MOSFET (Q116, Q118) of the two-transistor forward converter has a gate protection zener diode CR117, CR120 respectively. In addition, each power MOS­FET has a gate turnoff network.
6-20
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
+15V DC OUT
U119
U116, Q126
L103
Q127
Q128
SAWTOOTH BUFFER
CT
VREF
U112
RAMP/ISD
+15V
OUT
BUCK CONVERTER
CONTROLLER
T105
CURRENT SENSE
T108
Q122, Q123
L102
Q124, Q125
+26.5V
ISOLATION
HI/LO VOLTAGE
PROTECTION
OVER VOLTAGE
+5V TO U104
U105
+15V DC
+5V REG
U104A/B
Q110, Q111, Q112
U111
EXT IN
+26.5V DC
SYNC
L101
T106
CONTROLLER
U115
OVERVOLTAGE
SHUTDOWN
+5V DC OUT
CT
U113
RAMP/ISD
EA OUT/INV
OUT
FAN
FAN CONTROLLER
U120
U117, Q133
PROTECTION
OVER VOLTAGE
L104
T109
Q129, Q130
Q131, Q132
BUCK CONVERTER
U122
U118, Q138
PROTECTION
UNDER VOLTAGE
-5V DC OUT
OUT
U114
VCC
BUCK BOOST CONVERTER
T103
RT101, RT102
Q114
Q115, Q116
Q117, Q118
2-TRANSISTOR
LADDER
IAC
Q108
PFC
Q101
Q107
U102
RESISTOR
FB
I SENSE
T104
L107
CURRENT MODE
BOOST CONVERTER
DC IN
FWD CONVERTER
U110C
THERMAL
SHUTDOWN
T106PWM OUT
GATE DRIVE
LEVEL SHIFTING
U109
U108
Q104
VOLTAGE SENSE
VDC
VCC
RAMP
Q103
U107
Q105, Q106
BATT BACK-UP
ON/OFF SENSE
+6 to +18V
CR110, CR111
CR101, CR102
BRIDGE RECTIFIER
T101
AC IN
AC SENSE
BUFFER/
HYSTERESIS
AMPSENSOR
TEMP OUT
TEMP
TO REMOTE EN
U106 U101 U110A Q120, Q121U110D
+5V REGULATOR

Figure 6-8 BLOCK DIAGRAM

6-21
August 2000
Part No. 001-2001-200
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
In operation, the power MOSFETs Q116, Q118 are on for approximately one-third of the period pro­viding current to the primary side of T107. During that time CR121 is forward conducting and charging L101. When the MOSFETs are switched off, the mag­netizing current of T107 continues to flow through CR118, CR119. These diodes place 400V across the transformer in opposite polarity that resets the trans­former core. During the off period CR128 is free wheeling and L101 is discharging. Transformer T107 provides the isolation between the low voltage and high voltage sections.
The +26.5V pulse width modulator is peak cur­rent mode controlled. This type of converter requires current and voltage sense. T105, CR112, R125, R146 and C125 provide the current sense circuit. The volt­age sense circuit is U109 and the associated circuitry on the isolated side of the supply.
An opto-isolator is used to cross the boundary from high to low voltage sections. In the event of an over-voltage condition (>+32V) U115 and associated components turn the power sup ply of f . This s hutdown mechanism latches the power supply Off. The enable line must be turned Off for 10 seconds for the power supply to reset. T106 has a tap to provide current to the optional battery back-up (Part No. 023-3-2000-
830). The +26.5V is available at the high current out­put connector to the power supply and it also powers the +15V, +5V and -5V converters through F102.
6.5.4 SYNCHRONIZING CIRCUITS
The +15V and +5V sections run at the same fre­quency as the + 26.5 V pu lse wi dt h modulator. In order for a beat note not to be produced, a sync circuit is used. If two converters are not synchronized, the dif­ference frequency may show up at an undesired loca­tion in the repeater.
Divider R151/R152 samples the output of the main pulse width modulator. When Q116 and Q118 turn on, the output on U104A, pin 3 goes high. C138, R176, CR122 along with U104B creates a very narrow pulse on U104B, pin 6. Q110, Q111 and Q112 level shift and buffer this pulse. When the narrow pulse is presented to the timing capacit or of the +15V and +5V
converters, the cycle terminates and a new one starts. This forces the +15V and +5V converters to run at the same frequency and is slightly delayed from the +26.5V converter.
6.5.5 FAN AND THERMAL SHUTDOW N
The voltage supply to the thermal measurement circuit is generated from transformer T101 and the associated bridge rectifier consisting of CR101, CR102, CR110 and CR111 and bulk storage capacitor C101. This voltage is approximately +9V when the AC voltage is at 120V AC.
NOTE: This DC voltage is depen dant on the input AC voltage.
U106 provides a very accurate +5V required for proper operation of the temperature sense circuit. A precision tempera ture sensor (U101) is mount ed to the +26.5V rectifier heatsink. The output of this sensor is 10 mV/°C with a ±1% accuracy. This voltage is amplified by U110A with precision resistors R183/ R184 setting the gain.
The output of gain stage U110A is fed to the computer interface via WO116 to monitor power sup­ply temperature with the programmer. The output of U110A, pin 3 is also connected to the thermal shut­down circuit U110C, R135, R136, R137, R138 and R139. If the heatsink temperature reaches 92°C (198°F) the output of U110C, pin 8 goes high and sat­urates Q103. When Q103 is turned on U107 is turned off and the power supply turns off. The remote volt­age is always present so when the heatsink tempera­ture drops to 80°C (176°F) the power supply restarts. The high temperature cond ition woul d only ex ist i f the fan was blocked or faulty.
The output of U110A, pin 1 also connects to the fan controller. U110D with the associated resistors provides a means to turn the fan on/off. Transistors Q120/Q121 provide current gain and a voltage level shift to run the fan. The fan turns on when the heat­sink reaches approximat ely 45°C (113°F) and turns off again when the temperature reaches 35°C (95°C). In normal operation the fan turns on and off.
August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200
6-22
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
6.5.6 +15V CONVERTER
The input voltage to this "Buck" DC/DC con­verter is the main +26.5V output f use d thr ough F102. The bias voltage for the controller IC U112, pin 15 is provided by a +15V regulator U111. The basic buck converter consists of MOSFET Q125, Schottky diode CR126 and storage inductor L102. C165, C166, C167, L103, C169 and C170 filter the output voltage and attenuate the ripple at the switching frequency (160 kHz). The capacitors are an integral part of the feedback loop. The duty cycle is approximately 60%.
The +15V buck converter is peak current mode controlled. T108 samples the inductor current while MOSFET Q125 is on. The sampled current is trans­lated to a voltage via CR127, R209 and R210.
Because the MOSFET is a high-side switch, a charge pump is required to get the gate voltage above the input voltage. The charge pump operates as fol­lows. When the output from IC U112, pin 14 is low, capacitor C162 is charged through CR124, R198, R199, R200 and Q122/Q123 ar e o ff. When U1 12, pin 14 goes high, the capacitor stays charged and CR124 is reverse biased. Q122/Q123 are turned on forward biasing CR125 and applying a gate-to-source voltage of approximately +12V. During this time Q124 is o f f. When U112, pin 14 goes low, Q124 turns on and rap­idly discharges the gate cap acitance.
Resistors R231/R208 cou pled with C164 provide snubbing for Schottky diode CR126.
Because the +15V converter operates at greater than 50% duty cycle, slope compensation is required. Capacitor C176 is the time capaci tor f or t his con verte r and R223 is the resistor that sets the charge current. A sawtooth wave is pr esent on the high side of C176 that is buffered by Q127/Q128. The resistor divider net­work of R315, R227, R229 and R232 provide the cor­rect amount of compensation for stable operation and current limiting.
The output voltage is sampled by R215, R216 and R217 and sent to the inverting side of the error amplifier i nternal to the controller IC on U112, pin 1. Voltage loop compensation is set by C174, C175 and R221.
Sync pulse is added into the low side of C176 via C172 and R225. The free running frequency of the 15V converter (approximately 145 kHz) is set about 10% lower than the 26.5V convert er. This longer duty cycle allows the sync circuit to synchronize the con­verter.
Over voltage is sensed using U116 as a reference and amplifier, CR129 acts as a crowbar on the out­put. Once the crowbar is turned on, opto-isolator U119 is activated to shutdown the power supply. The enable line must be toggled or AC voltage removed for 10 seconds to reset the power supply.
6.5.7 +5V CONVERTER
Operation of the +5V "Buck" DC/DC converter is the same as the +15V, except slop compensation is not required. Some values are different to get the
5.2V DC and current limit to 6A. The duty cycle is approximately 20%.
6.5.8 -5V CONVERTER
The -5V "Buck-Boost" converter scales and inverts the voltage. This converter is free running at approximately 75 kHz. The output switch and con­troller are built into the 5-leg TO-220 IC U114. L105 is the storage inductor. C204, R270 and R271 close the voltage feedback loop and are set for optimum sta­ble transient response. C208/C209 reduce output rip­ple. Under-volt age prot ecti on is r equire d on thi s stag e and works the same as the over-voltage protection of the +15V and +5V buck converters, but has opposite polarity.
6.5.9 POWER SUPPLY REPAIR AND ALIGN-
MENT
If a power supply fails it is typically a Power MOSFET or Power Diode. In some cases the MOS­FET gate may short and cause some of the driver cir­cuits to be damaged. When replacing heat sunk com­ponents it is advisable to replace the sil-pad thermal interface material at the same time. The mounting hardware mu st be replaced exactly as built in the fac­tory. The mounting screws for the power semiconduc­tors MUST BE torqued to 4-5 in/lbs. Under torque and over torque can shorten the life of the semicon­ductor.
6-23
August 2000
Part No. 001-2001-200
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
The majority of the v oltage and current li mi ts ar e set with fixed value components in the power supply. However, the +26.5V, +15V and +5.2V supplies are adjustable. When certain components are replaced, the voltages must be adj usted . The voltag es shoul d be set at light l oad (i.e. repe ater in the Receive mode).
1. The +26.5V supply can be adjus ted with R174 when
any of the following components are replaced: R173, R174, R175, U109, U108, U102, R143, R170 or R171.
2. The +15V supply can be adjusted with R216 when
any of the following components are replaced: R215, R216, R217 or U112.
3. The +5.2V supply can be a dju sted with R2 54 when
any of the following components are replaced: R253, R254, R255 or U113.
6.6 BATTERY BACK-UP MODULE
6.6.1 OPERATION
When a battery back-up module is installed in a power supply it performs the function of running a repeater in the absence of AC voltage. When AC is present it can be used to charge a pair of lead-acid bat­teries in series. The charger is a temperature compen­sated constant voltage charger. The maximum output current from the charger is 2.2A. The charger works when AC is p resent and the repeater is enabled. The charger swit ch on t he battery back-up modul e mus t b e "On". The temperature compensation thermal sensor is part of 023-2000-223 battery back-up module cable assembly.
When AC is low or not applied to the 023-2000­800 power supply the battery input takes over if the voltage is within range. The input voltage to the bat­tery back-up module acts as the 26.5V supply and the other voltages in the power supply also are present, +15, +5.2 and -5V. When AC is restored, the battery back-up module disengages automatically. The change over from battery to AC or AC to battery may cause the repeater to reset, depending on battery con­dition and load status.
6.6.2 CHARGER
The charger charges the batteries when the repeater is on and switch S101 is "on". A tap off of the main transformer of the power supply through wire W104 and a +26. 5V l ine vi a wire W102 are what supply the charger with the necessary voltage to charge the bat teries. The ta p off of the transformer is biased by the +26.5V and then filtered through L101, C105 and C119. Since the tap from the power supply is not a regulated voltage, bleeder resistors R136/ R137 dissipate some power when the batteries are fully charged. No load situation, the peak voltage of the tap is ap proximately 63V, is not impressed across the 50V capacitors C105/C119. During a battery charging condition the line voltage to the charger on U107, pin 2 should be about 35V.
While charging batteries, if the charge voltage is varied with respect to the temperat ure of the batteries, the lifetime of the batteries is increased dramat ically. Figure 6-9 shows the algorithm used in float charge applications for two 12V lead-acid batteries in series. Figure 6-9 shows that the charge voltage should be
27.3V DC ±0.15V at 25°C (77°F) with -55 mV/°C temperature compensation.
An LM317M linear voltage regulator (U107) is used to create the temperature compensated charge voltage. This device is capable of delivering 2.2A of continuous current to the batteries .
To create a temperature compensated voltage an op amp (U104) is used as a voltag e gain devi ce fro m a temperature probe attached to the batteries (part of 023-2000-223). This op amp wit h R148/ R149 defi nes the slope for the algorithm of Figure 6-9. The output of the temperature compensation is attached to the adjust pin of U107. R138-R140 allow the output volt­age to be set properly at a given ambient tempera­ture. F101 is a 4A resettable fuse used to prevent ther­mal run away in the event of U107 failure. If the output current to the batteries exceeds 4A this fuse opens. Once the current drops below 100 mA, the fuse closes automatically.
NOTE: When using a genera tor, the DC voltage must be between 23-28.5V (26.5V DC is recommended) and ripple voltage less than 1% or approximately
0.25V P-P.
August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200
NOTE: If any of the charging components are re­placed, R140 needs to be adjusted to set the output (battery back-up battery terminals) voltage to 27.3V ±0.15V when temperature sensor is at 22°C (71.6°F).
6-24
Charger Voltage
30V
27.3V
25.2V
-55mV/°C
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
6.6.4 ENGAGING THE RELA Y
The main purpose of the Battery Back-Up Mod­ule (BBM) is that when the power supply loses AC line voltage, a pair of series connected 12V lead acid batteries (approx imatel y 26.4V) or o ther 23-28.5V DC source will engage to the supply allowing the repeater to operate. To perform this function a voltage compar­ator (U101) is used to monitor the charge tap coming from the power supply.
24V
-30° +30° +60°
+22°
Temp (°C)
Figure 6-9 NO LOAD CHARGE VOLTAGE vs.
TEMPERATURE
6.6.3 REVERSE BATTERY PROTECTION
To obtain reverse battery protection a number of techniques were implemented. Q108/Q110 are arranged in a Darlington configuration to isolate the output capacitors C109-C111 from conducting in the event the batteries are connected backwards. This cir­cuit also provides a means to turn the battery charger off in case the user wants to run the repeater off of another DC source. S101 opens the base of Q105 which turns off Q104. CR111 is a green light emitting diode (LED) located on the right hand side of the bat­tery back-up module when looking at the front of the power supply that tells t he user the cha r ger is in cha rge mode and is marked "On".
To notify the user that the batteries are connected improperly R101/CR101 are connected in series across the batteries. CR101 is a red LED that lights when the batteries are connected backwards and is located on the left hand side of the battery back-up module when looking at the front of the power sup­ply. This LED is marked "Reverse Bat.". CR113 eliminates a path for the reverse battery current through the relay and over/under voltage protection circuitry.
NOTE: Exceeding -30V acr oss the battery back- up ter­minals with the power supply on will destroy Q105.
A 2.5V reference voltage is supplied to the com­parator from U102. The transformer tap voltage is smoothed and divided by CR114, C118, R116, R121 and R122. The values for these components were cal­culated so that when the AC line voltage is dropped to 70V AC, the output of the comparator turns Q103/ Q102 on which in turn engages the relay K101. The relay is capable of 30A which delivers the battery energy to the power supply via W102 with the return line being W103.
NOTE: When AC is r estored, the relay disengages and the charger automatically begins to charge the batter­ies.
6.6.5 OVER/UNDERVOLTAGE SHUTDOWN
U101 is a quad comparator IC used to create the overvoltage and undervoltage shutdown circuitry. If the batteries are drained sufficiently enough such that the voltage of the batteries drops below 20.3V DC the output of the comparat or goes low a nd turns Q10 2 off . By turning Q102 off the batteries are switched out of the circuit. The ba tt er ies cannot be switched bac k into the repeater until the voltage rises to 22.6V DC. This operation is in place to protect the repe at er and the bat­teries. In the event the batteries are over charged, or the repeater is driven by the generator that has the voltage set too high, the relay will disengage above
30.5V DC. In order to switch the batteries back to the repeater, the voltage must drop below 29V DC.
In an overvoltage or undervoltage situation, whether AC is present or not, the red LED (CR105) lights until the problem is rectified. This light is located on the right-hand side of the battery back-up module when looking at the front of the power supply and is marked BAT-BAD.
6-25
August 2000
Part No. 001-2001-200
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
6.6.6 BBM FAN CONTROL
The voltage supply to the t hermal measu rement circuit is taken from the 26.5V DC li ne into the BBM. A precision temperature sensor U106 is mounted on the PC board near a screw into the BBM bracket which transfers heat to the sensor. The output of this sensor is 10 mV/°C with a ±1% accuracy. This volt­age is amplified by U105 with resistors R153/R154 setting the gain.
The output of this gain stage (pin 1) is fed to another gain stage that performs as a comparator. The output (pin 7) will go high when the heatsink tempera­ture reaches 45°C and will go low when the tempera­ture goes below 35°C. This output is sent to the power supply through Q106 to turn the fan on and off.
6.7 CARD RACK
The card rack provides slots for up to eight logic cards; including Main Processor Card (MPC), Main Audio Card (MA C) and the Int erface Alarm Card (IAC). The IAC has a notch in the card to accommo­date a pin in Slot-8 so that no other card can be plugged into this slot.
On the back of the card rack is the Backplane with plug-in connectors to the cards and cables to the RF modules, Power Supply and External Connector Board.
Refer to the component layout and schematic dia­gram in Section 10 for mo re information on the repeater backplane.
August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200

Figure 6-10 BACKPLANE CONNECTORS

6-26
6.8 EXTERNAL CONNECTOR BOARD
The external connector board (A10) is the interface for the alarm outputs, connecting repeaters through the high speed data bus.
A7
ALARMS
TO CARD RACK
P10
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
A10
P
I
T
-
S
E
1
A
E
D
O
M
T
X
E
EXTERNAL
CONNECTOR
A
+
S
M
X
R
X
T
1
Q
E
R
D
T
N
X
U
O
C
R
A
G
V
5
+1
BOARD
+
D
S
U
A
T
O
V
C
L
I
FA
C
A
N
I
1
A
L
A
A6
REPEATER I/O
TO CARD RACK
J1
J3
N
I
T
D
A
N
D
U
C
V
O
C
A
R
V
G
5
1
I
+
S
S
+
R
N
I
+
1
+
N
I
T
2
+
U
T
O
U
1
O
2
TO CARD RACK
P11
S
H
6
5
+
B
D
-
B
+
D
S
B
H
-
D
B
R
I
D
+
R
I
A
4
L
T
3
A
L
T
2
1
J1
A5
HIGH SPEED
DATA BUS
-
33
-
-
-
N
I
T
2
-
U
T
O
U
1
O
2
34
R
M
S
D
J
A
2
T
A
1
D
A
T
A
2
+
3
+
4
N
2
E
1
-
3
-
1
4
4
2
A
C
T
A
U
I
O
T
X
E
O
L
A
R
C
M
I
N
A
L
J1
Q
Q
E
S
R
T
7
X
1
E
M
I
O
C
C
N
Y
S
1
9
4
M
0
5
M
O
C
-
3
-
4
N
I
D
C
I
X
O
T
V
X
R
X
A
R
T
M
O
U
T
P1
N
+
3
T
+
U
4
O
D
3
X
5
T
M
O
4
5
C
M
5
O
5
C
M
3
O
C
1
0
/
I
E
E
C
I
O
V
N
A
B
W
X
R
M
O
C
25
D
6
M
26
A-
X
R
2
+
A
+
X
A
R
X
T
P
I
1
T
A-
X
G
1
T
N
I
G
R
N
I
R
B
E
B
-
M
XS
R
X
T
J
2

Figure 6-11 EXTERNAL CONNECTOR BOARD

6-27
August 2000
Part No. 001-2001-200
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
P2-0 P2-1 P2-2 P2-3 P2-4 P2-5
TxD0
RxD0
P1-6 CTS0 TxD1
RxD1
CTS1
P1-0
P1-1
P1-2
P1-3
P1-4
STAGING
STAGING
LATCH
PROGRAMMABLE
DMA
CONTROLLER
SERIAL
COMMUNICATION
INTERFACE
BAUD RATE
GENERATOR
PROGRAMMABLE
INTERRUPT
CONTROLLER
X1 X2
CLOCK
LC etc.
PSW
PC
ALU
TA
TB
TC
INT RAM
256 BYTES
GR
MACRO SERVICE CHANNEL
INSTRUCTION DECODER
MICRO SEQUENCER
MICRO ROM
LATCH
INT ROM
16K BYTES
QUEUE
ADM A19-A0
PFP
INC
RESET P2-6
P2-7
P1-7 MSTB MREQ R/W IOSTB EA
BUS CONTROL LOGIC
P1-4
D7-D0
16-BIT TIMER
P1-5 REFRQ P0-7
TIME BASE CONTROLLER
P0 P1 P2 PT0-PT7

Figure 6-12 U27 BLOCK DIAGRAM

6.9 MAIN PROCESSOR CARD
6.9.1 INTRODUCTION
The Main Processor Card (MPC) connect s to the computer with repeater software to program the repeater parameters, sets and reads the alarms, handles communication between repeaters, maintains the audio gating for the MAC, handles initialization requests from cards and contains the repeater RF data for the Receiver, Exciter and CWID .
PORT
PORT WITH
COMPARATOR
V
TH
Control function s for ea ch repea ter are performed by the Main Processor in the MPC installed in each repeater. The MPC contains the main software and control over the repeater via microprocessor U27 (see Figure 6-17).
Information is excha nged betwe en repeate rs via a High-Speed Data Bus (HSDB) that interconnects all the MPCs. This control technique is c alled distribu­tive processing and it eliminates the need for a sepa­rate system controller at each site. The HSDB proces­sor (U13) on the MPC provides these control functions. The MPC also contains:
August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200
6-28
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Flash Memory, RAM , non-volatile EEPROM.
I/O chip select to allow the addressing of data
latches for Input/Output.
Read/Write sele ct ion t o be s ent a nd rec eiv ed on the
Controller Backplane.
Clock line, data line and chip select line from the
IAC to load the Receiver and Exciter synthesizers .
Serial communication circuitry and processes for
the High Speed Data Bus (HSDB).
Asynchronous parallel communication to the other
cards, i.e. alarm input and output circuitry.
AC Power Failure indication from the IAC.
Provides an output from the IAC to the power
amplifier to control the output power.
Exciter Logic Push-To-Talk (PTT).
Receiver synthesizer lock, Exci ter synthesizer lock ,
thermal level from the power amplifier, VSWR level from the P A, forwar d power level, RSSI signal level, audio levels from the MAC, Receiver and Exciter from the IAC.
6.9.2 MAIN CONTROLLER MICROPROCES­SOR
peripherals. Internal RAM and the SFR area are together and can be relocated anywhere in the 1M­byte address sp ace . This maintains compatibility with existing system memory maps.
The two microprocessors and USART (U22) are reset by integrated circuit U17. Reset occurs when power is turned o n, when t he 5V su pply dr ops bel ow a threshold level or the reset switch (S1) is active.
When a microprocessor is reset, several internal registers are cleared an d the progra m is started ov er from the beginning. Low-voltage reset prevents improper operation resulting from low-voltage conditions.
When power is turned on, the RESET output U17, pin 6 is initially high and the inverted RESET output U17, pin 5 is in it ially low. Once the 5V supply stabilizes, these outp uts remain in these states for approximately 100 ms to ensure that reset occurs.
This time delay is set by capa citor C14 conn ected to U17, pin 3. If the 5V supply drops below a nominal level, the RESET outputs change states and micropro­cessor operation is interrupted until the 5V supply returns to normal. C3 prev ents fast transients on the 5V supply from causing reset.
Manual reset can be accomplished by pressing push-button switch S1. When U17, pin 2 goes low, U17 goes into the reset sequence described.
U27 contains the main software and control over
the repeater (see Figure 6-12).
The main controller (U27) is a VLSI (Very Large Scale Integration) CMOS 16-bit single chip computer with an 8-bit external data bus. This processor has software compatibility with the V20 (8086/8088), faster memory access, superior interrupt processing ability, and enhanced control of internal peripherals. This ROMless processor has a variety of on-chip com­ponents including 256 bytes of RAM, serial and paral­lel inputs/outputs, comparator port lines and timers.
Eight banks of registers are mapped into internal RAM below an additional 256-byte special function register (SFR) area that is used to control on-chip
6.9.3 HIGH SPEED DA T A BUS MICROPROCES­SOR (U13)
The HSDB processor (U13) on the MPC pro­vides the interface with the HSDB. It monitors data on this bus and al so transmits data on to this bus when necessary. Information on this bus indicates which repeaters are in use and also which mobiles are using the system. This info rmation i s used by t he repeat er to encode data messages to the mobiles that are monitor­ing that channel. These messages also include infor­mation on which repeater is free and current syst em priority.
August 2000
6-29
Part No. 001-2001-200
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Microprocessor U13 is an 8052 tha t uses exter nal EPROM (Erasable Programmable Read Only Mem­ory) U14, an 8-bit devic e that store s the p rogram. Th e microprocessor uses 2k x 8 EPROM and 64k x 8 RAM. The RAM (Random Access Memory) is used for temporary data sto r age. The HSD B processor is configured by the Main Processor.
The internal data bus of the microprocessor has four input/output ports. These ports have eight lines each, giving a total of 32 input/output lines. These ports are designated P0, P1, P2, P3. P0 is used as a data bus. Ports P1 and P2 are always used as general purpose inputs/outputs. P3 is used for specialized functions, i.e. a serial port (RxD/TxD) and interrupt (INT).
The operating speed of the microprocessor is set by an 11.059 MHz cl ock gene rat ed by Y2. This clock frequency is divided down by an internal divider to provide a machine cycle time of 1.08 µs. Most pro­gram instructions are executed in one machine cycle and none require more than four machine cycles.
Pins 1-10 ADDRESS BUS Pins 33-42
This provides a path between the MPC main pro­cessor and the external memory on the MPC and the other cards in the Controller. This bus retrieves infor­mation programmed into memory for the operatio n of the repeate r.
Pins 11-14 DATA BUS Pins 43-46
The data bus provides a means of transferring data to and from the CPU on the MPC, memory stor­age on each card and peripheral devices in and out of the MAC and IAC.
Pin 15 MREQ
MREQ is a memory request line operates in con­junction with the Read/Write lines. These provide the ability to read from or write to the main processor memory on the MPC.
The microprocessor U13 communicates with the main processor (U27) through U9 and U10. U9 is a Transmit FIFO (First In First Out) and U10 is a Receive FIFO. This combination makes up an asyn­chronous parallel-to-parallel interface to the Main Processor.
Microprocessor U13 al so calculates the curren t system priority for the channel. This priority is from the programming software responses and the curr ent priority is sent to the main processor. U13 also reads repeater number and channel number information in memory. U13 also determines the current free repeater and includes that information in the data sent to the Main Processor.
6.9.4 CHIP SELECT DECODERS (U15/U4)
Chip select decoders se lect the peripheral chip to read from or write to.
6.9.5 P1 SIGNAL CONNECTOR
Pin 16 MSTB
MSTB is a memory strobe line used during MPC main proces sor Read/Write operations to external memory on the MPC and other cards plugged into the backplane.
Pins 17-20 UNUSED
Pin 21 LPTT
The Logic Push-To-Talk is an open collector from the Controller. It has a sink capability of 20 mA and a maximum voltage rating of 18V. The transmit­ter should produce p ower when thi s pin is a logic lo w. Transmit indicator is on the IAC and is controlled independently of the LPTT.
Pins 22-23 UNUSED
Pins 24/56 HSDB+/HSDB-
This is the signal interface connector P1 (64 pin) that connects the Address and Data buses and control lines to the backplane connector.
August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200
This interc onnects all repeaters to provide an exchange of information. This control technique is called distributive processing and eliminates a sepa­rate system controller at each site. Information on this
6-30
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
bus indicates which repeaters are in use and also which mobiles are using the sys tem. This informati on is used by the repeater to encode dat a messages to the mobiles that are monitoring that channel. These m es­sages also include information on which repeater is free and cur rent system priority.
Pins 25-26 UNUSED
Pins 27/59 -5V IN
This is the -5V input to the MPC from the power
supply via the Controller backplane.
Pins 28-29 +5V IN Pins 60-61
This is the +5V inp ut to the MPC from the power
supply via the Controller backplane.
Pins 30/62 +15V IN
This is the +15V input to the MPC from the
power supply via the Controller backplane.
Pins 31-32 GROUND Pins 63-64
This is the ground connection to the MPC from
the power supply via the Controller backplane.
6.9.7 J2 MEMORY SELECT
J2 is jumpered to select ei ther the Flas h memory or the EPROM memory. Flash memory is ultra-fast data storage. The normal setting is pin 1 to pin 2.
Pin 1 +12V Pin 2 U25, pin 1 Vpp Pin 3 +5V
6.9.8 J3 BAUD RATE
J3 is jumpered to select the baud rate from the computer to the MPC, these two baud rates must be the same (see Figure 6-17). The baud rate of the com­puter can be found from the command line by request­ing /b, /h or /? (see Section 3.1.5). To change jumper J13: Power off the station. Move P3 to the proper rate. Power on the station.
6.9.9 S2/S3 HSDB SETTINGS
These switches configure; the HSDB for RS-485 or single-ended 5V operation, indicate if the Summit repeaters are connected to existing repeaters or only Summit repeaters, and if the repeater is an end repeater termination. Refer to Sections 2.9 and 7.4.8.
Pin 47 READ
Read is used with the MREQ line to read data
from the main processor and external memory.
Pin 48 WRITE
Write is used with the MREQ line to wri te data to
the main processor and e xternal memory.
Pins 49-55 UNUSED Pins 57-58
6.9.6 J1 COMPUTER CONNECTOR
J1 is the MPC connection to the computer or
modem.
Pin 1 Ground Pin 2 Computer Tx Pin 3 Computer Rx Pin 4 Modem DCD
6.9.10 J4 EPROM MEMORY LOADING
This jumper selects EPROM memory loading for LTR systems. The LTR setting is pin 3 to pin 4.
6.9.11 J5 HSDB SPEED
J5 is jumpered to select the data bus speed. J5, pins 2/3 select the LTR 12 MHz crystal.
6.9.12 J6 WATCHDOG
This jumper enables or disables the watchdog timer for reset. Normal operating mode is P6 jumper ­ing J6, pins 2/3. This jumper should not be moved or removed.
August 2000
6-31
Part No. 001-2001-200
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
6.10 MAIN AUDIO CARD
6.10.1 INTRODUCTION
This control card stores the information required to operate the routing of audio and data from the inputs of the repeater to the outputs. Data is received on the address bus from the MPC for the operations to perform. The Audio/Data microprocessor and the latches open and close gates to route a path for the audio or data.
Audio control functions for each repeater are per­formed by the Main Processor in the MPC. The MPC contains the software and maintains control over the repeater via microprocessor U27. The audio/data microprocessor passes received data to the main pro­cessor, and it is given the programmable parameters for the gates.
Information is exchanged between the cards in the Controller Backpl ane via a data bus a nd an add ress bus. The address bus provides the link between the main processor and t he chip and the addres s latc hes on the MAC. These latches control the octal latches that select the audio and data gates. The data bus is the link between the Main Processor and the Audio/Data Processor on the MAC. The Main Processor controls the data to the octal latches and opens and closes the gates required to route audio/data in and out of the repeater. The MAC also contains:
The audio interface between the receiver and exciter
and to the external connections.
The receive audio filtering with de-emphasis.
6.10.2 AUDIO/DATA MICROPROCESSOR
This Audio/Data microp rocessor is o n the MAC card and is used to deco de LTR data received from the mobiles. The LTR data is applied to U111, pin 8 (P1.7 input). When a word is successfully decoded the data is then sent to U161 (Tx FIFO) and transmitted on the data bus in parallel to the main processor on the MPC.
When it is time to transmit the CW Identification, the main pro cessor on the MP C sends the ide ntifica­tion to U111 via the data bus and U160 (Rx FIFO). The CWID is sent to the Tx Data Amplifier and Fil­ter. The output of the f i lter is summed with the trans­mit audio and sent to the Exciter.
U111 also uses six octal latches to provide addi­tional input and output lines. Latch U107/U108 pro­vide outputs which allow U111 to control various audio gates. Thes e gate s cont rol t he CWI D, FSK da ta, and receive/transmit audio signals.
Latch U106 provides outputs which allow U111 to route signals to the Audio/Data Test Point by switching gates on and off. U106 also provides adjust­ment of the selected EEPOTs.
U155-U156 allow U111 to select the EEPOT to adjust with chip select lines. These latches also pro­vide routing of some audio/data signals through gates.
In addition, U111 controls the receive and trans­mit audio gates, receiver squelch, several front-panel indicators, and oth er funct ions. U1 11 encodes the data messages transmitted to mobiles monitoring that chan­nel, and controls transmitter keying.
The squelch filter and detector.
Slow decay timing circuit that controls a mute gate
on the main receive audi o.
A filter, DC restoration and slicer circuitry for
detecting the subaudible data.
The fast squelch and data fed to the mi cropro ces sor
that decodes the data and uses the squelch line as a data qualification signal.
Transmit au dio filter and limit er wit h pr e- emphasis.
August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200
6.10.3 RECEIVE AUDIO
The Receive Wide Band Audio (RX WBAND) signal from the Receiver is fed into the MAC on P100, pin 27. This audio signal includes; audio, LTR data, and noise. The audio processing circuit provides fil­tering and amplification of the audio signal before it is routed to the outputs on the MAC card.
A low-pass filter consisting of U121A/B atte nu­ates frequencies above 3 kHz. This removes high-fre­quency noise from the audio signal. From the filter the signal is fed to amplifier U122A to increase the level before the high-pass filter to preserve adequate hum and noise ratio.
6-32
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
From the audio amplifier the signal is fed to a high-pass filter consisting of U122B/C/D. This filter attenuates frequencies below 300 Hz which removes data present in the wide band audio signal. These fil­ters are configured to act like large inductors. The sig­nal is then fed to U163A which provides 6 dB per octave de-emphasis.
Audio gates U113B/C/D permit noise squelch cir­cuit, control logic, and audio switch to control gating of the audio signal. The control signal from the noise squelch circuit is applied to U113B through U113D. When a carrier is detected, this input is high and U113B passes the signal. Programming determines the gating of audio. When audio is passed by U113B/ C and U114A, the audio can be routed through other gates to various outputs (see Section 6.10.6).
6.10.4 RECEIVE SQUELCH CIRCUITRY
The receive wide band audio inclu des audio, data and noise. The squelch circuit detects this noise to determine receive signal strength. When no carrier or a weak carrier is received, there is a large amount of noise present. Conversely, when a strong carrier is present, there is very little noise present.
U135A is a high-pass filter which attenuates fre­quencies below approximately 30 kHz so that only high-frequency noise is passed. This noise is ampli­fied by U135B and U123A. A level control adjusts the gain of amplifier U135B. The gain of U123A is partially set by a thermistor to compensate for circuit gain and noise level changes caused by temperature variations.
The amplified noise is then applied to a bridge rectifier. The difference between bridge rectifier out­puts is applied to the inputs of U123B. The output of U123B is positive-going pulses. These pulses are applied to U123C which is a Schmitt trigger. When the input signal rises above the reference the output goes low and causes the reference voltage to decrease slightly ad ding hysteresis to the tri ggering level. This hysteresis prevents intermittent sque lching when th e receive signal strength is near the threshold level.
The output of U123C is applied to U123D and Logic Squelch to Audio/Data Gate U159B and audio/ data processor U111. Gate U159B routes the squelch
output to th e Audio/Data Test Point J100. U123D functions as a timing buffer. The output of U123D is applied to Receive Squelch Active Gate U113D. When this gate is closed, the squelch circuit controls Normal Receive Gate U113B to block receive audio if no signal is present.
6.10.5 RECEIVE DATA CIRCUITRY
The receive wide band audio signal is the unfil­tered output of discriminator U202 in the Receiver. Therefore, this signal contains audio, LTR data, and noise. A low-pass filter formed by U124A/B attenu­ates frequencies above 150 Hz by 24 dB per octave so that only the data freque nci es are passed. From the fil­ter the signal is fed to amplifier U125A. The gain of U125A is adjusted by a level control. The output of U125A can be routed through Data To Audio/Date Gate U159C and the Audio/Data Test Point J100.
DC restoration circuit converts the data signal from AC floating near ground to a digital signal at lev­els of 0 and 4.5V. U125B/C provide the reference voltage on the inverting input of comparator U125D. Positive peak detector U125B handles the positive­going peaks of the data s ignal. Negati ve peak de tect or U125C handles the negative-going peaks of the data signal.
The voltage on non-inverting input to U125D is midway between the positive- and negative-going peaks. The data input is on the non-inverting input of U125D. When the data signal rises above the refer­ence voltage, the output goes high. Conversely, when the input voltage drops below the reference voltage, the output goes low. The receive data is then passed to audio/data processor U111.
6.10.6 RECEIVE AUDIO PROCESSING
The receive audio signal is fed into the MAC on P100, pin 27. When a mobile-to-mobile call is received, Repeat Gate U153C is enabled and the receive audio signal is routed through T ran smit Option Gate U158C to the input of the transmit audio buffer U164B to be retransmitted. Repeat Gate U153C is controlled by processor U111 through latch U107. A logic 1 on the control input causes the signal to be passed.
6-33
August 2000
Part No. 001-2001-200
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
When the received audio must be routed to the backplane (i.e. for other cards), Receive Voice Gate U115B is enabled by processor U111/latch U108 and passes the audio signal to amplifier U120B. Receive To Backplane (RX TO BP) U115C is enabled and passes the amplified audio to the backplane.
When the audio received must be routed to the external speaker or speaker/microphone, Local Audio Mute Gate U114D is enabled by U111/latch U108. The audio is passed to local audio output amplifier U132. The gain of U132 is adjusted by the local audio volume control and on/off switch.
6.10.7 VOTER AUDIO
When used, the Receive audio from the voter receiver comes into t he MAC on P10 0, pi n 25 . Ampli ­fier U120A sets the gai n of t he si gnal and the output is routed to Voter Audio Mute Gate U115A. The gate is controlled by A/D processor U111/latch U108. If the gate is enabled, the audio goes to the Receive Mute Gate U113C and passes throughout the MAC Card.
6.10.8 COMPANDOR OPTION
microphone PTT switch is pressed. This prevents interference if the microphone remains live when the PTT switch is pressed.
Buffer U164B combines the microphone audio signal from U164A with the audio signal from the Repeat Gate U153C.
U127B/C form a high-pass filter that attenuates frequencies belo w 300 Hz t o pr event interference wit h the LTR data applied at U129B. Pre-emphasis at 6 dB per octave is provided by an RC combination before the signal is fed to the Limiter U127D.
Limiter U127D and rectifiers form a precision limiter which prevents over modulation caused by high-level input si gnal s. With normal input levels, the output of a bridge rectifier follows the input of the bridge. When a high-level signal is applied to the bridge, the bridge op ens and t he output of the b ridge is limited to a specific level.
The output of the limiter passes to a composite 6­pole splatt er filter formed by U127A , U128D and U128A separated by buffers U128B and U128C.
The compandor option enhances the receive and transmit audio when use d in conjunction with th e Tele­phone Interface Card (TIC) in LTR systems.
The filtered Receive Audio passes through the Receive Mute Gate U113C to the expander input on A301, pin 1. The expand output of A301, pin 2 is cou­pled to the audio outputs by U114C.
The TX-VOICE from P100, pin 32, passes through TX Voice Gate U158A to the expander input on A301, pin 5. The compressed output of A301, pin 4 is passed to the TX Audio Buffer.
6.10.9 TRANSMIT AUDIO
PTT switch (Q101/Q102) provides local micro­phone Push-To-Talk (PTT) indication to U105. U105 then tells U111 via the data bus that the local micro­phone PTT has been activated.
U164A amplifies the microphone audio signal to provide the correct input level to U164B. Local Microphone Mute Gate U117C is controlled by A/D processor U111/latch 106. The function of U117C is to mute the local microphone audio when the local
August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200
The output from U128A is fed to Normal Modu­lation Mute Gate U118B that is controlled by A/D pro­cessor U111/latch U106. When enabled, the gate passes transmit audio to EEPOT U149. U149 is an electronically ad just able pot entio meter th at ad justs the gain of transmit audio amplifier U129C. The gain of U129C can only be adjusted through the software. Therefore, a computer must be attached to the MAC card when levels are set.
The output of U129C is fe d to s umming ampli fier U129B where it is combined with LTR transmit data and CWID when present. The gain of audio and data are the same so unity gain is produced. The output signal is fed to the TCXO where it frequency modu­lates the tra nsmit signal.
6.10.10 TRANSMIT AUDIO PROCESSING
Transmit voic e from t he backpl ane comes into t he MAC on P100, pin 32. When used this signal passes to the transmit voice amplifier U130A. The output level of the amplifier is a djusted by a level control. The output of U130A is applied to another transmit voice amplifier U130B and Transmit Voice Gate U158A. U158A is controlled by A/D processor U111/
6-34
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
latch U107. When enabled, the gate passes the voice to Transmit Option Gate U158C and on to the transmit audio buffer U164B. T rans mit Voice amplifier U130B is adjusted by a level control. The output is fed to Transmit Net Gate U153B. Gate U153B is controlled by A/D processor U111/latch U155.
6.10.11 TRANSMIT DATA AND CWID PRO­CESSING
The data signal is produced by A/D processor U111 on Transmit Data and Transmit Shape outputs. The transmit shape output is normally the opposite logic level of the transm it data outpu t when data is transmitted. However, the bit before a logic transition occurs, the transmit shape output is the same logi c level as the transmit data output. This results in a logic 1 level that is slightly higher and a logic 0 that is slightly lower. This pulse shaping minimizes interfer­ence between data bits when the data is filtered by the low-pass filter.
The data from U111 is fed to buffer U126A and Transmit Data Enable Gate U117B. Gate U117B is controlled by A/D processor U111 directly. When enabled this gate passes the data to EEPOT U151. U151 is an electronically adjustable potentiometer that adjusts the gain of transmit audio amplifier U126B. The gain of U126B can only be adjusted through the software. Therefore, a computer must be attached to the MAC card. U126B provides the required signal level at the output of the low-pass filter. A relatively stable DC bias voltage for U126C/D is required because these stages are DC coupled to the transmit TCXO (see Section 6.2.3) and changes in bias voltage can cause fluctuations in the transmit frequency.
U126C/D fo rm a low-pass filter that attenuates square-wave harmonics in the data signal above 150 Hz to prevent interference with the audio band. From this filter th e signal is fed to summing amplifier U129B and combined with the transmit audio sign al. The output of U129B is fed to Transmit Modulation Mute Gate U118D. This gate is controlled by A/D processor U111/latch U106. When enabled, transmit audio and data are passed to the Exciter modulation input and the transmit TCXO.
U111/latch U106. When enabled, this gate passes the modulation on pin 11 to the summing amplifier U129B and gate U118D to the modulation in put of the Exciter.
The repeater on the lowest frequency channel in each system must periodically transmit the station call letters as a continuous-wave identification encoded by Morse Code. This identification is programmed with the Edit Parameters software.
The CWID output is control led by A/D pr ocessor U111/latch U107. This output is fed to CWID tone generator U100B/A and turns the tone generator on and off to create the Morse Code. From the tone gen­erator the signal is fed to bandpas s fil t er U129A. This filter passes the 800 Hz fund ament al present in the sig­nal. The output of the filter is jumpered by P106 on J106, pins 2/3 and P107 on J106, pins 4/5 to the sum­ming amplifier and applied to gate U118D, and to the modulation input of the Exciter.
The input and output c onne ct ors for the MAC are defined as follows.
6.10.12 P101 SIGNALING CONNECTOR
The signal interface connector P101 (64 pin) con­nects the Address and Data buses and control lines to the backplane connector. See Figures 6-18 and 6-19.
Pins 1-10 ADDRESS BUS Pins 33-42
This provides a path between the MPC main pro­cessor and the processor and memory of the MAC. This bus retrieves inform ation program med into mem­ory for the operation of the MAC.
Pins 11-14 DATA BUS Pins 43-46
This data bus provides a means of transferring data to and from the processor on the MAC with peripheral devices in the MAC.
Pin 15 MREQ
When needed the External Modulation input on P100, pin 11 is fed to External Modulation Mute Gate U118C. Gate U118C is controlled by A/D processor
A memory request line operates in conjunction with the Read/Write lines. These provide the ability to read from or w rite to the processor memory.
August 2000
6-35
Part No. 001-2001-200
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Pin 16 MSTB
The memory strobe line is used for MAC proces-
sor Read/Write operations to external memory.
Pins 17-20 UNUSED
Pin 21 LPTT
The Logic Push-To-Talk is not used.
Pins 22-23 UNUSED
Pins 24/56 HSDB +/-
The High Speed Data Bus interconnects the Viking VX repeaters. A 50 ohm termination is required if Viking VX repeaters are used with existing repeaters and the interface.
Pins 25/57 IRDB +/-
This data bus interconnects all repeaters to pro­vide an exchange of programming information with the programming software and computer. This data bus allows all repeaters to be accessed without having to connect the computer to the MPC on each repeater individually.
Pin 26 TLA DB
Pins 31-32 GROUND Pins 63-64
This is the ground connection to the MPC from
the power supply via the Controller backplane.
Pin 47 READ
Read is used with the MREQ line to read data
from the processor and ex ternal memory.
Pin 48 WRITE
Write is used with the MREQ line to writ e data to
the processor and external memory.
Pins 49-55 UNUSED
Pin 58 VOTER DATA IN
This is used in a Voter system. Data from the
voter site is injected at this pin.
6.10.13 P100 EXTERNAL OUTPUTS
Connector P100 contains the audio and data out­puts to the terminal block on the back of the Repeater cabinet. These outp uts are connected to ot her ext er nal devices. The input and output connectors for the con­nector are defined as follows.
The Trunk Line Accounting Data Bus is used for
telephone in terconnect calls.
Pins 27/59 -5V IN
This is the -5V input to the MPC from the power
supply via the Controller backplane.
Pins 28-29 +5V IN Pins 60-61
This is the +5V input to the MPC from the power
supply via the Controller backplane.
Pins 30/62 +15V IN
This is the +15V input to the MPC from the
power supply via the Controller backplane.
August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200
Pins 1-6 UNUSED
Pin 7 3.5V
This is the 3.5V DC TCXO reference voltage from the Exciter to the MAC.
Pin 8 TX DATA OUT
This output contains trunking sign al ing data and CWID data when enabled at jumper J106 and used with external optional equipment.
Pin 9 TX DATA IN
This input would normally contain trunking sig­naling data, CWID data, and an externally summed in signal. This input is enabled at J106 and is used with external optional equipment.
6-36
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Pin 10 EXT REQ1
This input provides for external requests from
optional equipment.
Pin 11 EXT MOD
This input provides for external wide band modu­lation of the Exciter with out any filtering. This input is not used at this time.
Pins 13-26 UNUSED
Pin 27 RX WB AUDIO
The Receive W ide Band Audi o from the Rece iver audio demodulator through the RF Interface Board. The typical amplitude is 387 mV RMS (-6 dBm) and 2V DC with Standard TIA Test Modula­tion into the receiver.
Pin 28 A D LEVEL
6.10.15 J101 SPEAKER/MICROPHONE
This jack is used in con junct ion wit h J102 when a combination speaker/microphone is used during setup and testing of the repeater.
6.10.16 J102 LOCAL MICROPHONE
This jack is used for a microphone to key the Exciter and inject transmit audio.
6.10.17 J103 GROUND
This jack provides a ground connection for the MAC when monitoring the test points.
6.10.18 J104 EXTERNAL SPEAKER
This provides an external speaker connection at the repeater site for monitoring.
6.10.19 J105 WATCH DOG
This is the Audio/Data Level output.
Pin 29 TX MOD
The output of this pin is produced by audio and data inputs to the Repeater to produce the signals on this pin. This signal goes through the RFIB and then to the Excite r.
Pin 30 UNUSED
Pin 31 RX VOICE
This is receive audio output connected to the backplane.
Pin 32 TX VOICE
This is transmit audio input connected to the repeat gate.
6.10.14 J100 A D LEVEL TEST POINT
J105 enables or disables the watchdog timer for reset. Normal operating mode is P105 jumpering J105, pins 2/3. Do not move or remove this jumper.
6.10.20 J106 TX DATA PATH
Jumpers P106/P107 connect J106, pins 1-2 and 3­4 for external options that need the Tx Data signal. Normal operation connects J106, pins 2-3 and 4-5.
6.10.21 A301 COMPANDOR CONNECTIONS
EP101 Expand In EP102 Expand Out EP103 Ground EP104 Compress Out EP105 Compress IN EP106 +5V
This test point located on the front card edge is
used during alignment to monitor audio and data.
6-37
August 2000
Part No. 001-2001-200
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
6.11 INTERFACE ALARM CARD
This card utilizes the information required to operate the alarms designated in the programming of the repeater. Data is received on the address bus from the MPC for the; operation to perform, the processor and external memory, open and close relays on the outputs, and receive alarm indications on the inputs. This information is either rout ed to ext ernal devices or alarm outputs can be wir ed t o al ar m i npu ts (see Figure 4-10).
The Interface Alarm Card (IAC) contains 4-input contacts and 4-output contacts. The 4-inputs can be disabled, energized or de-energized. The 4-output relays are dry contacts that have a 2A rating and can be either normally open or normally closed.
The electromechanical relay outputs are com­prised of eight SPDT (normally open) relays. The relays are all open at power-on. Data to the relay is latched by a write to the base address.
The IAC acti vates relays when alarm trigger events occ ur. The IAC monitors fo r alarm activity in the system and can set the various output relays as defined by the user during programming. When an external alarm i s set i t can be moni tore d from a remot e location. Refer to Section 4.3.3 for alarm programming.
The isolated inputs are dr iven by eit her AC or DC signals. The active high inputs can be set by switches to be polarity sensitive, non-polarity sensitive or add a resistance in series to dissipate unused power (see Fig­ure 6-15).
The active low inputs can also be set for either +5V or +15V operation when a ground closure is required to provide an active alarm.
3+
+
N
4
Q2
E
SQ E
7
TR
1
X
E
50
-
3
-
4
IN
COM
SYNC
+
3
4+
OUT
3
D
5
TX
M
O
C
COM 54
COM
5
5
I/0 13
25
IN
CE
I
D
TX
RX VO
ND
OICE
V
BA
TX
6
W
M
RX
OM
C
3-
2
ALARM IN
-
4
1
1
4
C
IA
EXTOU
1
T
COM 49
M
O
C
ALARM OUT
26

Figure 6-13 4 I/O J1 ALARM OUTPUTS

6.11.1 RELAY OUTPUTS
The alarm relay outputs are provided via a termi­nal block on the back of the repeater (see Figures 6-13 and 6-14).
The alarm outputs are on the termi nal bl ock at th e rear of the repeater.
6.11.2 ISOLATED INPUTS
The isolated alarm inputs are provided via a ter­minal block on the back of the repeater (see Figures 6­13 and 6-14).
August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200
6-38
1
2
+
N
I
1
2 IN +
UT +
O
1
L
FAI
C
A
N -
I
1
J2
2 IN -
1 OUT -
2 OUT -
A
L
A
34
R
M
S

Figure 6-14 4 I/O J2 ALARM OUTPUTS

2 OUT +
33
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Standard 12V/24V AC control transformer out­puts can be accepted as well as DC voltages. This input voltage range is 5-24V RMS. External resistors connected in series may be used to extend the input voltage range.
ALARM +
ALARM -
P500
+15V
ON
1
8+5V
2
7
3
6
45
+5V

Figure 6-15 S500-S503

6.11.3 ALARM INDICATORS
There are three forms of alarm indica tors from the repeater. One form is the two red LEDs and dis­play combination on the MPC. Refer to Table 1-2 for the combinations and definitions of the active alarms.
1 is fed back to the input alarm 1 of Repeater 1. Then the RF Shutdown alarm (#32) is ma pped for alar m 1 in each repeater. This configuration allows Repeater 2 to give an alarm when Repeater 1 has an RF Shutdown alarm output, etc.
The input alarms are given a 15-character description during programming and a Transmit ID. These are used when an input alarm is activated to send a Morse code message consisting of the descrip­tion over the air to a monitoring transceiver pro­grammed with this ID.
There are 40 internal alarms that can be included in the output alarm configuration (see Table 1-2). These alarms can also be programmed to send an out­put as shown in the cross refe re nce scre en of the al arm configuration menu (see Figure 4-10). Among these alarms are the thermal sense from the PA and the AC fail alarm output on the terminal block at the rear of the repeater to activate the battery backup.
Another form is the output relay to the terminal blocks at the rear of the repeater where outputs can be wired to external devices or to alarm inputs.
The third form is the output relay and to transmit a 15-character description of the alarm over-the-air to a remote location. The description is sent in Morse code with a transmit I D assigned during p rogramming. A transceiver program med with this ID can monito r the repeater and aler t the sys te m own er wh en an al arm occurs.
6.11.4 ALARM FUNCTIONS
The alarms can be configured in various mode s to alert the system owner to conditions and hazards with the equipme nt and the repeater site facility. A few of the possibilities are shown in Figure 6-16. In this example the input alarm 2 of Repeater 1 is connected to the door of the bui lding , inp ut alarm 3 of Repeate r 5 is connected to the fire alarm system, the AC fail alarm (#16 see Table 1-2) is mapped to alarm 2 output so it can be transmitted (see Figure 4-10) and the out­put alarm 1 of Repeater 1 is connected to the input alarm 1 of Repeater 2 and so on until the output alarm
TRANSCEIVER
AC FAIL
DOOR OPEN
REPEATER 1
REPEATER 2
REPEATER 3
REPEATER 4
REPEATER 5
SENSOR ACTIVE
ALARM 2 IN
ALARM 1 IN
ALARM 1 OUT
ALARM 1 IN
ALARM 1 OU T
ALARM 1 IN
ALARM 1 OU T
ALARM 1 IN
ALARM 1 OU T
ALARM 1 IN
ALARM 1 OU T
ALARM 3 IN

Figure 6-16 ALARM EXAMPLE

SECURITY DOOR
SMOKE
DETECTOR
6-39
August 2000
Part No. 001-2001-200
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
6.11.5 P500 SIGNALING CONNECTOR
The input and output connectors for the IAC are defined as follows. The signal interface connector P500 (64 pin) connects the Address and Data buses and control lines to the backplane connector. See Fig­ure 6-20.
Pins 1-4 ADDRESS BUS (A12-A19 Only) Pins 33-36
This address bus provides a path between the MPC main proc essor and the latches and multiplexers of the IAC. This bus retrieves information pro­grammed into the MPC memory for the operation of the IAC.
Pins 5/37 ALARM 1 IN +/ALARM 1 IN -
This is an input received from a connection to an external device as a specific alert condition.
Pins 6/38 ALARM 2 IN +/ALARM 2 IN -
This is an input received from a connection to an external device as a specific alert condition.
Pins 11-14 DATA BUS Pins 43-46
This data bus provides a means of transferring data to and from the latches and multiplexers on the IAC with peripheral devi ces in the IAC.
Pin 15 MREQ
A memory request line operates in conjunction with the Read/Write lines. These lines read from or write to the MPC processor memory.
Pins 16/17 UNUSED
Pin 18 SYNC IN
This is an input received from a connection to an external device.
Pins 19/51 ALARM 1 OUT +/ALARM 1 OUT -
This is an output to an external device to perfo rm a specific function.
Pins 20/52 ALARM 2 OUT +/ALARM 2 OUT -
Pins 7/39 ALARM 3 IN +/ALARM 3 IN -
This is an input received from a connection to an
external device as a specific condition.
Pins 8/40 ALARM 4 IN +/ALARM 4 IN -
This is an input received from a connection to an
external device as a specific alert condition.
Pin 9 SQUELCH ENABLE
This is an output to rear connector J1. It can be configured for inverted output, non-inverted output or logic controlled non-inverted output.
Pin 10 EXTERNAL REQ 2
This is an input received from a connection to an external device.
This is an output to an external device to perfo rm
a specific function.
Pins 21-23 UNUSED
Pins 24/25 +15V ACCESSORY
This DC supply is an output to an ext ernal device
through rear connector J1.
Pins 26/58 +15V FILTERED
This DC supply is an output to an ext ernal device
through rear connector J1.
Pins 27/59 -5V IN
This is the -5V input from the power supply via
the Controller backplane.
August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200
6-40
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Pins 28-29 +5V IN Pins 60-61
This is the +5V input to the MPC from the power
supply via the Controller backplane.
Pins 30/62 +15V IN
This is the +15V input to the MPC from the
power supply via the Controller backplane.
Pins 31-32 GROUND Pins 63-64
This is the ground connection to the MPC from
the power supply via the Controller backplane.
Pins 41-42 UNUSED
Pin 47 READ
Read is used with the MREQ line to read data
from the MPC processor and external memory.
6.11.6 P501 EXTERNAL OUTPUTS
Connector P501 contains data and cont rol output s to the terminal block on the back of the Repeater cabi­net. These outputs are connected to other external devices.
The input and outp ut connec tors for the conn ector are defined as follows.
Pins 1/17 ALARM 3 OUT +/ALARM 3 OUT -
Pins 2/18 ALARM 4 OUT +/ALARM 4 OUT -
These are outputs to exter nal device s to perform a specific function.
Pin 3 RX WBAND
Receive Wide Band Audio from the Receiver audio demodulator through the RF Interface Board. The typical amplitude is 387 mV RMS (-6 dBm) and 2V DC with Standard TIA Test Modulation into the receiver.
Pins 4-6 UNUSED
Pin 48 WRITE
Write is used with the MREQ line to write data to
the MPC processor and external memory.
Pins 49-50 UNUSED
Pins 53-55 UNUSED
Pin 56 THERMAL SENSOR
The Therma l Sensor monitors the PA tempera­ture and creates an alarm condition if the temperature exceeds the limit.
Pin 57 POWER SWITCH
Pin 57 turns the v olt ag e f rom t he power supply to the Repeater on and off. This pin is connected to the on/off toggle switch S508.
Pin 7 EXT OUT 1
This is an external output to rear connector J1.
Pin 8 RF CLOCK
The clock will control the synthesizer chips and power control circ uit when loa ding. This pin is a TTL input from the Controller.
Pin 9 AC FAIL IN
This input from the AC supply is used by the AC fail output to indicate that the AC has been interrupted.
Pin 10 SYN CS RX
This is the chip select pin for the main receiver synthesizer chip. This chip is the same part as used in the Exciter. A low loads the synthesizer.
6-41
August 2000
Part No. 001-2001-200
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Pin 11 UNUSED
Pin 12 RF MUX 1 INH
The Multiplexer-1 Inhibit (U105, pin 6) is a CMOS input from the Controller that inhibits (dis­ables) the Multiplexer-1 output with a logic high.
Pin 13 RF MUX 2 INH
The Multiplexer-2 Inhibit (U106, pin 6) is a CMOS input from the Controller that inhibits (dis­ables) the Multiplexer-2 output with a logic high.
Pin 14 RF MUX 3 INH
The Multiplexer-3 Inhibit (U104, pin 6) is a CMOS input from the Controller that inhibits (dis­ables) the output from the RF 3 Multiplexer with a logic high.
Pin 15 PC STR
The Power Control Strobe is normally low until after the po wer control data is shifted into the power control register. Then the strobe line goes high and back to low. The clock or data lines cannot be changed until after the strobe is set.
Pin 16 HS CS EX
This is the Exciter high stability synthesizer chip select. A low enables loading the high stability syn­thesizer loop. This pin is only used on high stability equipped units.
Pins 19-21 UNUSED
Pin 22 BUF RX WBAND
Pin 23 AC FAIL OUT
This is an indication tha t the AC power has been
interrupted.
Pin 24 UNUSED
Pin 25 HS CS RX
This is the receiver hig h stabil ity synt hesi zer ch ip select. A low enables loading the high stability syn­thesizer loop. This pin is only used on high stability equipped units.
Pin 26 SYN CS EX
Pin 26 is the exciter main Synt hesizer Chip Se lect that allows input of data to U403 when the line is pulled to logic low.
Pin 27 UNUSED
Pin 28 A D LEVEL
20 lines (of the possible 24) of RF functions sam­pled are multiplexed to the Controller through this pin using three multiplex chips.
Pin 29 RF DATA A
Data A (U105, pin 11) is the least significant bit (LSB) in the 3 multiplex chips located on the RFIB. This pin is a CMOS input from the Controller requir­ing a logic high for activation.
Pin 30 RF DATA B
Data B (U105, pin 10) is the middle significant bit in the 3 multiplex chips located on the RFIB. This pin is a CMOS input from the Controller requiring a logic high for activation.
This is buffered Receive Wide Band Audio from the receiver audio demodulator through the RF Inter­face Board. The typical amplitude is 387 mV RMS (­6 dBm) and 5V DC with Standard TIA Test Modula­tion into the receiver. This is an output to t he rear con­nector J1.
August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200
Pin 31 RF DATA C
Data C (U105, pin 9) is the most significant bit (MSB) in the 3 multiplex ch ips located on the RFIB. This pin is a CMOS input from the Controller requir­ing a logic high for activation.
6-42
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
Pin 32 RF DATA
This is a data pin with TTL levels from the Con­troller which has the dual role of loading the synthe­sizer chips and adjusting the power control D/A lines for proper output power. Up to four synthesizer chips and a shift-register could be connected to this pin.
6.11.7 J500 A D LEVEL TEST POINT
20 lines (of the possible 24) of RF functions sam­pled are multiplexed to the Controller through this pin using three multiplex chips.
6.11.8 J501 GROUND
J501 is an IAC ground reference for test points.
6.11.9 J502 +15V
J502 is a voltage test point.
6.11.10 POWER SWITCH
S508 turns the power supply DC voltage on and
off from the front of the IAC.
6.11.11 J505 SQUELCH ENABLE OUTPUT
P505 jumpers J505, pins 1/2 to configure the squelch enable output for an inverted output. P505 jumpers J505, pins 2/3 t o co nfi gur e t he squelch enable output for a non-inverted output. P505 jumpers J505, pins 3/4 to configure the squelch enable output for a non-inverted output under the control of U503.
6-43
August 2000
Part No. 001-2001-200
CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION
August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200
6-44
A0-A19
LPTT
IRDB-
RIDB+
SWITCH TxD
SWITCH RxD
READ
WRITE
MREQ
DS1
+5V
U6B
READ
WRITE
LED DRIVER
U15
DISPLAY DRIVER
U26
BALANCED Rx/Tx
U24
U20CU6A
ADDRESS BUS (19:0)
MAIN MICROPROCESSOR
PO0 PO1 PO2 PO3 PO4 PO5
A B C D
DE
D R
DMARQ0 DMAAKO TC0 DMARQ1
INT POLL TxD1 RxD1
TxD0 RxD0
R/W
MREQ
PT2
A0-A19
READY
U27
RESET
READY
INTP0 INTP1 MSTB
T OUT
D0-D7
PT1
PT0
PO6
T OUT
X1
X2
U30A/U31A
Y1 10 MHz
Q2/Q3
U11
RST1
U17
RES IN
RST2
FLASH
EPROM
+5V
RESET
S1
FLASH MEMORY
A0-A16
U25
Vpp
OE WE Vpp CE
DQ0-DQ7
DATA BUS (7:0)
A16
A17
A18
A19
U20B U20A
A13
A14
A15
A0-A14
D0-D7
A
B
C
D O14
O15
A
B
C
Y2
EPROM
U18
G
O0
U5
O13
G2B
U4
Y0
O11
E
W
RAM
A0-A12
D0-D7
U28
CE
DE WE
Y1
READ
WRITE
MSTB
UART
RxRDY TxE
D0-D7 D0-D7
MODEM DCD 4
COMPUTER Tx 2
COMPUTER Rx 3
U2
Y3
J1
U16F
U16D
U16C
MPC
1
CP
U21
RESET
PROGRAMMING PORT
BAUD RATE
9600 4800 2400 1200
J3
2 4 6 8 10 12 14
76800 38400 19200
1 3 5 7
9 11 13
RxD
TxD
CLOCK
TxC
RxC
U32B
OE
Y0-Y3
U31
OE
U32A
Y0-Y3
U30
RD WR
U22
U2F
RST
U20D U6C
TX FIFO
MR DIR S1
U9
DOR SO
CS
RST P1-1 P3-7 P3-6
D0-D7
U13
A8-A15
HSDB -
HSDB +
U2F/U31B
DE
B
U23
A
R
U16B
DE
P1-3
P3-1
P3-0
HIGH-SPEED DATA BUS
MICROPROCESSOR
PROCESSOR TO PROCESSOR COMMUNICATION FIFOs
A0-A7D0-D7
DE
ADDRESS BUS (7:0)
U2B U6D
ADDRESS
SELECT
P1-0
P1-2
PSEN
ALE
A13
A14
A15
ADDRESS/DATA BUS (8:15)
Y1Y2
A
B
U3
CY0
A0-A7
*U1CS1
DOR SO
A0-A7
MR DIR
U7B U2A
OE
WE
A8-A12
D0-D7
U2C U7A
DE
U10
S1
EEPROMRAM
A8-A13
D0-D7
A0-A7
U14
OE
ADDRESS BUS (7:0)
LOWER
ADDRESS LATCH
A0-A7 D0-D7
U8
CEN
6-45
August 2000
Part No. 001-2001-200
MAIN PROCESSOR CARD BLOCK DIAGRAM
FIGURE 6-17
FOLDOUT
A0-A19
MREQ 15
MSTB 16
D0-D7
VOTER DATA IN 58
+15V 30
+15V 62
P101
Z102
A16-A19
TX FIFO
S1
D0-D7
ADDRESS LATCHES
A-D
U103
D1 G1
U101E
DIR
DE
S0
MR
U161
DOR
A0-A7
+9V REG
U136
A12-A15
A-D
G2
U154B
U101C U154D
U162D
U17-1
RESET
U133
Q3
U119
TX FIFO
Q4
Q5
Q6
Q7
Q8
Q9
RX FIFO
Q2
MPC LATCH
Q1
P100
EXT REQ
LOCAL MIC PTT
Q102
OC
D3
U105
D4
D1
AUDIO/DATA
MICROPROCESSOR
P3-7 P1-3
U111
P1-1P1-1
D0-D7
P3-0
RST
D0-D7
D2
P3-6
P1-0
P1-2
A8-A15
ALE
PSEN
P1-6
P1-7
P3-2
P3-3
P3-4 U117B-8 TX DATA EN
A13
A14
A15
U159B-8 LOGIC SQUELCH
U125D-14 RX DATA
U126A-3 TX DATA
U126A-3 TX SHAPE
DATA BUS (7:0)
Y2
A
B
U102
C
ADDRESS SELECT
ACCRESS BUS (15:8)
Y1
ADDRESS/DATA BUS (7:0)
U154A
RX FIFO
U119 U101D
LOWER ADDRESS LATCH
Q0-Q7
A0-A7
U104
C EN
DE
DOR
U160
A0-A7 D0-D7
MR
DIR
S1
U101F
S0
D0-D7
A8-A14
EPROM
U112
OE
A0-A7
GATE LATCHES
D1-D8
CLK
D1-D8
CLK
D1-D8
CLK
D1-D8
CLK
D1-D8
CLK
U108
U107
U106
U156
U155
U115A VOTER AUDIO MUTE
U114D LOCAL AUDIO MUTE
U113C RX MUTE
U114A RX OPTION
U115B RX VOICE
U116B RX AUDIO
U115C RX VOICE TO BACKPLANE
U116A FSK TO AUDIO
U153C REPEAT
U153D TxS TO FSK
U116D TxA TO FSK
U159C DATA TO A D
U116C Tx AUDIO
U158A Tx VOICE
U153A DATA LEVEL TEST
U100B CWID CONTROL
U159A LEVEL DETECT
U158C Tx OPTION
U117C LOCAL MIC MUTE
U118C EXTERNAL MOD MUTE
U118B NORMAL MOD MUTE
U118D Tx MOD MUTE
U151-U149 INC
U151-U149 U/D
CS0
CS1
CS2
CS3
WO 125
CS5
CS6
WO 126
U153B Tx NET
U115D Rx NET
CS10
CS11
U149 CS12
WO 127
U151 CS14
CS15
August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200
U117A Tx INTERCOM
U157
D1-D8
CLK
U113D Rx SQ ACTIVE
U159B LOGIC SQ A D
U159D Tx MOD A D
U113B NORMAL Rx
WO 118
WO 117
WO 116
MAIN AUDIO CARD LOGIC BLOCK DIAGRAM
FIGURE 6-18
6-46
Rx VOICE
GATE
U114D
LOCAL AUDIO
OUTPUT AMPLIFIER
U132
J104
EXTERNAL SPEAKER
VOTER AUDIO 25
Rx WB AUDIO 27
TxS - 4
SECONDARY AUDIO
FROM SWITCH
TxS + 3
P100
LOW-PASS FILTER
U163B
HIGH-PASS FILTER
> 30 kHz
U135A
Rx DATA
FILTER
U124A/B
VOTER AUDIO
AMPLIFIER
U120A
< 3 kHz
U121A/B
AMPLIFIER
U135B
Rx DATA
AMPLIFIER
U125A
U131C
NOISE
VOTER AUDIO
U115A
Rx AUDIO
AMPLIFIER
U122A
+1.25V
U123A U123B
Tx AUDIO
AMPLIFIER
U131D
MUTE
U108
DC
RESTORATION
U125B/C
HIGH-PASS FILTER
U122B/C/D
NOISE
RECTIFIER
U125D
TxS TO FSK
GATE
U153D
U107
> 300 Hz
DATA LEVEL
TEST GATE
U153A
SCHMITT TRIGGER
U123C
U111 Rx DATA
DE-EMPHASIS
U163A
TIMING BUFFER
U123D
LOGIC SQ A-D
U159B
GATE
U157
U157
U157
NORMAL RX
GATE
U113B
U113D
Rx ACTIVE
GATE
DA TA TO A-D
GATE
U159C
U107
RX MUTE
GATE
U113C
U108
RX OPTION
U114A
U114B
RX OPTION
A301
COMPANDING
OPTION
GATE
U108
U114C
U108
Rx VOICE
GATE
VOICE
AMPLIFIER
U115B U120B
U108
REPEAT
GATE
Rx NET
GATE
U115D
U153C
U155
U107
RX AUDIO
GATE
U116B
U108
Rx VOICE
TO BACKPLANE
U115C
FSK AMPLIFIER
U165B
FSK TO AUDIO
GATE
U116B
U108
GATE
U108
MAIN AUDIO
AMPLIFIER
U166A
SECONDARY
AUDIO AMPLIFIER
U131A
FSK AMPLIFIER
U165A
TxD
Tx OUT TxD
U109
RxD
U110
Rx IN
BUFFER
U166B
BUFFER
U131B
U162C
U162B
J101
P101
23 SWITCH Tx DATA
22 SWITCH Rx DATA
SPEAKER/MIC
RS-232
P100
31 Rx VOICE
14 Rx AUDIO -
13 Rx AUDIO +
2 RxS -
1 RxS +
MAIN AUDIO TO SWITCH
SECONDARY AUDIO TO SWITCH
TxA + 15
MAIN AUDIO
FROM SWITCH
TxA - 16
Tx VOICE 32
Tx AUDIO
AMPLIFIER
U167A
HIGH PASS FITLER
U167B/C
Tx VOICE
AMPLIFIER
U130A
U167D
TxA TO FSK
Tx VOICE
AMPLIFIER
U130B
Tx VOICE
GATE
U158A
U107
GATE
U116D
U107
U107
Tx AUDIO
GATE
U116C
U107
Tx NET
GATE
U153B
U155
LOCAL MIC PTT
J102
Tx OPTION
LOCAL MIC MUTE
U164A
Q101 Q102
Tx OPTION
GATE
U158C
U158D
U158B
Tx OPTION
GATE
Tx INTERCOM
GATE
U117A
U157
GATE
U117C
U106
U106
Tx AUDIO
BUFFER
U164B
U105 LOCAL MIC PTT
LEVEL DETECT
GATE
U159A
U106
HIGH-PASS FILTER
> 300 Hz
U127B/C
LIMITER
U127D
Tx MOD A D
GATE
U159D
U157
SPLATTER FILTER
LPF
U127A
BUFFERS
U128B/C
Tx SHAPE U111
Tx DATA U111
LPF
U128D/A
U126A
U106 INC
U106 U/D
NORMAL MOD MUTE
GATE
U118B
U106
U106 INC
U106 U/D
Tx DATA ENABLE
GATE
U117B
U111
Tx AUDIO AMPLIFIER
U149
U129C
Tx DATA AMPLIFIER
U151
U126B
U155 CS12
U155 CS14
Tx DATA FILTER
U126C
CWID TONE
GENERATOR
CWID FILTER
U100B/A U129A
U126D
P106
P107
J106
SUMMING
AMPLIFIER
U129B
J100
A-D LEVEL TEST POINT
Tx MOD MUTE
GATE
U118D
U106
EXTERNAL MOD MUTE
GATE
U118C
U106
28 A-D LEVEL
8 TxD OUT
9 TxD IN
29 Tx MOD
6-47
August 2000
Part No. 001-2001-200
MAIN AUDIO CARD AUDIO BLOCK DIAGRAM
FIGURE 6-19
FOLDOUT
DO-D7
A13-A19
THERMAL
SENSOR
READ
WRITE
P500
ALARM 2 OUT
ALARM 1 OUT
DATA BUS (7:0)
IAC ADDRESSING LED CONTROL
A16 A17 A18 A19
A13 A14 A15
+
+
A B
U501
C D
Q3
G1
A B C G2MREQ
RD
WR
-
-
U500
O6
Q1
U506
K501 K500
O3 O2 O5 O7 O4 O1
INTR
D0-D7
V IN+
Q501 Q500
D0-D7
CLK
U518
Q4 Q7
RSSI O
U519
IFA IN
CLK
D1-D8
Q2
Q1
U503
Q0 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q6
ANALOG LEVEL DETECTOR
Q5 Q6
Q3
Q4
Q7
+5V
U508
U507D
J500
U509A U509B U507B
U509C U507C
MISC INPUTS
Q1-Q8
U517
OC
D3 D2 D8
D1
U507A
Q502 Q503
RF INTERFACE
Q1
U505
CLK
CLK
U504
Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7 Q8
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q5 Q6 Q7
D0-D7
D0-D7
Q8
U508E
K502 K503
U514BU514A
P501
RF MUX 1 INH RF MUX 2 INH RF MUX 3 INH PC STR HS CS EX STN CS EX HS CS RX STN CS RX
WO 1 AC FAIL IN
RF DATA A RF DATA B RF DATA C RF DATA RF CLK AC FAIL OUT WO 2
EXT REQ 1
A D LEVEL
+
ALARM 3 OUT
­+
ALARM 4 OUT
­BUF RX WBAND
RX WBAND
OC
U521
Q1-Q8
INVERTED
NON-INVERTED U503 CONTROL
NON-INVERTED
D1 D2
D6
D3 D4
J505
ALARM INPUTS
U520
U510
U513C
U511
U513B
U512
Q505
Q504
CR507 CR506
CR509 CR508
CR511 CR510
CR513 CR512
S500
S501
S502
S503
+5V
+5V
+5V
+5V
+15V
+15V
+15V
+15V
P500
+
ALARM 1 IN
-
+
ALARM 2 IN
-
EXT REQ 2
J503
+
ALARM 3 IN
-
J504
+
ALARM 4 IN
-
SQUELCH EN
August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200
INTERFACE ALARM CARD BLOCK DIAGRAM
FIGURE 6-20
6-48
ALIGNMENT AND TEST PROCEDURES

SECTION 7 ALIGNMENT AND TEST PROCEDURES

7.1 RECEIVER ALIGNMENT

C
R I T I C A L A D J U S T M E N T
The TCXO must be adjusted within 5 minutes of turn­ing the AC power on to the repeater. Do not under any circumstances try to set frequency later on in any of the tests, as TCXO frequency stability cannot then be guaranteed.
Refer to Figure 7-1 for component locations. Refer to Figure 7-6 for equipment needed and setup diagram. Select "RECEIVER" from the "TEST" menu in the Repeater Software.

7.1.1 PRETEST

Preset L102, L103, L104, L108, L109, L110, L140 and L141 tuning screws about 1/4 inch above the top of the casting.
For 12.5 kHz operation, place jumper plugs P203, P204 and P205 across pins 2-3 of J203, J204 and J205.
For 25 kHz operation, place jumper plugs P203, P204 and P205 across pins 1-2 of J203, J204 and J205.

7.1.2 VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS

Apply power to the Receiver by plugging the 20­pin cable from the RF Interface Board into J201 (see Figure 7-1
).
Measure the voltages at the following pins. U301, pin 3 +6V DC ±0.3V
U302, pin 3 +12V DC ±0.4V U303, pin 3 +12V DC ±0.4V U304, pin 3 +12V DC ±0.4V R402/R403 junction +3.5V DC ±0.1V
1. Using the PC and software, program the Synthe­sizer for the Receive frequency.
2. Tune the VCO capacito r L102 f or +7V DC ±0.05V at TP401. Increase the receive frequency by 1 MHz. The voltage on TP401 shall be less than 15V. Decrease the receive frequency by 1 MHz. The voltage on TP401 shall be greater than 2.5V.
3. Alternately tune CV151 and CV152 in 1/2-turn to 1-turn increments until a voltage is measured at TP401. At that time, tune CV151 for a peak, then CV152 for a peak.

4. Retune CV151/CV152 for a peak at TP401.

For Receivers ope rating within 2 MHz of the top of the receive band (148-150 or 176-178 MHz).
1. Program the Synthesizer for the Highest receive fre­quency (i.e. 150 or 178 MHz).
2. Set the control line voltage for 15V at TP401. Check 2 MHz below the programmed frequency (i.e. 148 or 176 MHz) to verify that the control volt­age at TP401 is greater than 2V. The repeater receiver can now be programmed for the desired operating frequency.
For Receivers operating wit hin 2 MHz of the bottom of the receive band (132-134 or 150-152 MHz).
1. Program the Synthesiz er f or the Lowest receive fre­quency (i.e. 132 or 150 MHz).
2. Set the control line voltage for 2V at TP401. Check 2 MHz above the programmed frequency (i.e. 134 or 176 MHz) to verify that the control volt­age at TP401 is less than 15V . The repeater receiver can now be programmed for the desired operating frequency.

7.1.3 PROGRAM TUNE-UP CHANNEL

For Receivers operating between: 132-150 MHz, 150-178 MHz.
NOTE: The Channel Frequency and Synthesizer Fre­quency appear at the bottom of the screen.
August 2000
7-1
Part No. 001-2001-200
ALIGNMENT AND TEST PROCEDURES
J201
2 1
J205
J204
U302
RV211
RV201
RV213
RV203
U202
RV202
Z216
Z214
U203
Z204
U201
L206
CV212
L204
Z202B
Z202A
Z212B
Z206
Z212A
Z205
Q211
Q201
20 19
U304
U204
RV212
Z215
U102
L216
CV212
L214
L213
CV211
Z211AZ211B
Z201A
Z201B
CV201
L203
Q204
Y201
FL201
CV152
L141
U101
L211
J203
L201
CV151
L140
CV106
L110
TP102
CV105
L109
FL102
U301
Q406
Q408
Q407
Q401
Q404
Q402
U303
Q134
CV104
L108
Q403
U401
Q405
Q410
Q133
Q101
Q102
TP401
Q409
Q411
Q132
Q131
CV103
L104
CV102
FL101
CV101
L103
L102
A201

Figure 7-1 RECEIVER ALIGNMENT POINTS

7.1.4 RECEIVER FREQUENCY ADJUST
1. Place a pick-up loop (sniffer) or RF probe con­nected to a frequency counter near TP102.
2. Set Y401 (TCXO) for the Injection Frequency ±50 Hz (Inj Freq = chnl freq + 52.95 MHz).
7.1.5 VCO TEST
1. The software programs the synthesizer for 1 MHz above the receive channel.
2. The voltage on TP401 should be < 10V.
3. Record the voltage on TP401 __________.
4. The software programs the synthesizer for 1 MHz below the receive channel.
5. The voltage on TP401 should be > 4V.
8. The software programs the synthesizer for the receive frequency.
7.1.6 FRONT END ADJUSTMENTS
NOTE: Verify that the appropriate IF jumpe rs (J203, J204, J205) are selected.
1. Set the signal generator to the receive frequency at a level sufficient to produce an output voltage at TP201 or J201, pin 7 (RSSI Output).
2. Tune CV101, CV102, CV1 03, CV104, CV105, and CV106, then repeat, for a peak voltage at TP201. Decrease the generator output level to maintain a 2-3V reading at TP201.
FOR 12.5 kHz CHANNELS:
NOTE: Perform this test if CV211 and CV212 are placed on the board.
6. Record the voltage on TP401 __________.
7. If the voltages recorded in Steps 3 and 6 are not
within ±0.2V, tune L102 as required to balance the voltage readings.
August 2000 Part No. 001-2001-200
1. Set the generator to an RF level sufficient to pro­duce 2V DC at TP201.
2. Remove any modulation from the signal generator.
7-2
Loading...